summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/66049-h/66049-h.htm
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/66049-h/66049-h.htm')
-rw-r--r--old/66049-h/66049-h.htm7939
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 7939 deletions
diff --git a/old/66049-h/66049-h.htm b/old/66049-h/66049-h.htm
deleted file mode 100644
index 486b61f..0000000
--- a/old/66049-h/66049-h.htm
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7939 +0,0 @@
-<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
- "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
- <head>
- <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" />
- <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" />
- <title>
- Pictorial Beauty on the Screen, by Victor Oscar Freeburg—A Project Gutenberg eBook
- </title>
- <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" />
- <style type="text/css">
-
-body {
- margin-left: 2.5em;
- margin-right: 2.5em;
-}
-
-h1, h2 {
- text-align: center;
- clear: both;
- margin-top: 2.5em;
- margin-bottom: 1em;
- word-spacing: .2em;
-}
-
-h2+p {margin-top: 1.5em;}
-h2 .subhead {display: block; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;}
-
-.transnote h2 {
- margin-top: .5em;
- margin-bottom: 1em;
-}
-
-.subhead {
- text-indent: 0;
- text-align: center;
- font-size: smaller;
-}
-
-p {
- text-indent: 1.75em;
- margin-top: .51em;
- margin-bottom: .24em;
- text-align: justify;
-}
-.center p, p.center {text-align: center; text-indent: 0;}
-
-.p0 {margin-top: 0em;}
-.p2 {margin-top: 2em;}
-.p4 {margin-top: 4em;}
-.b1 {margin-bottom: 1em;}
-.b2 {margin-bottom: 2em;}
-.vspace {line-height: 1.5;}
-
-.in0 {text-indent: 0;}
-
-.small {font-size: 70%;}
-.smaller {font-size: 85%;}
-.larger {font-size: 125%;}
-.large {font-size: 150%;}
-.xxlarge {font-size: 200%;}
-
-.center {text-align: center;}
-
-.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
-.firstword {font-variant: small-caps;}
-
-.bold {font-weight: bold;}
-
-hr {
- width: 33%;
- margin: 4em auto 4em auto;
- clear: both;
-}
-
-table {
- margin-left: auto;
- margin-right: auto;
- max-width: 80%;
- border-collapse: collapse;
-}
-
-td {padding-bottom: .5em;}
-.small td {padding-bottom: 0;}
-
-.tdl {
- text-align: left;
- vertical-align: top;
- padding-right: 1em;
- padding-left: 1.5em;
- text-indent: -1.5em;
-}
-
-.tdr {
- text-align: right;
- vertical-align: bottom;
- padding-left: .3em;
- white-space: nowrap;
-}
-.tdr.top{vertical-align: top; padding-left: 0; padding-right: 1em;}
-
-.pagenum {
- position: absolute;
- right: .25em;
- text-indent: 0;
- text-align: right;
- font-size: 70%;
- font-weight: normal;
- font-variant: normal;
- font-style: normal;
- letter-spacing: normal;
- line-height: normal;
- color: #acacac;
- border: .0625em solid #acacac;
- background: #ffffff;
- padding: .0625em .125em;
-}
-
-.figcenter {
- margin: 2em auto 2em auto;
- text-align: center;
- page-break-inside: avoid;
- max-width: 100%;
-
-}
-.figcenter.b1 {margin-bottom: 1em;}
-
-img {
- padding: 1em 0 .5em 0;
- max-width: 100%;
- height: auto;
-}
-
-.caption {text-align: justify; margin-top: 0; text-indent: 1.5em;}
-
-.footnote {
- border: thin dashed black;
- margin: 1.5em 10%;
- padding: .5em 1em .5em 1.5em;
-}
-
-.footnote {font-size: .95em;}
-.footnote p {text-indent: 1em;}
-.footnote p.in0 {text-indent: 0;}
-
-.fnanchor {
- vertical-align: 60%;
- line-height: .7;
- font-size: smaller;
- text-decoration: none;
-}
-.footnote .fnanchor {font-size: .8em;}
-
-a.ref {text-decoration: none;}
-
-.blockquot {
- margin: 1.5em 5% 1.5em 5%;
- font-size: 95%;
-}
-
-.blockquot.inhead p {padding-left: 1.5em; text-indent: -1.5em;}
-.blockquot.inhead.center p {padding-left: 0; text-indent: 0; text-align: center;}
-
-.poetry-container {
- margin: 1.5em auto;
- text-align: center;
- font-size: 98%;
-}
-
-.poetry {
- display: inline-block;
- text-align: left;
- margin-left: 0;
-}
-
-.poetry .stanza {padding: 0.5em 0;}
-.poetry .verse {text-indent: -3em; padding-left: 3em;}
-
-.poetry .indentq {text-indent: -3.45em;}
-.poetry .indent0 {text-indent: -3em;}
-
-.transnote {
- background-color: #999999;
- border: thin dotted;
- font-family: sans-serif, serif;
- margin-left: 5%;
- margin-right: 5%;
- margin-top: 4em;
- margin-bottom: 2em;
- padding: 1em;
-}
-
-.sigright {
- margin-right: 2em;
- text-align: right;}
-
-.wspace {word-spacing: .3em;}
-
-span.locked {white-space:nowrap;}
-.pagenum br {display: none; visibility: hidden;}
-.narrow {max-width: 25em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
-
-@media print, handheld
-{
- body {margin: 0;}
-
- h1, .chapter, .newpage {page-break-before: always;}
- h1.nobreak, h2.nobreak, .nobreak {page-break-before: avoid; padding-top: 0;}
-
- p {
- margin-top: .5em;
- text-align: justify;
- margin-bottom: .25em;
- }
-
- table {width: auto; max-width: 100%; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;}
-
- .tdl {
- padding-left: 1em;
- text-indent: -1em;
- padding-right: 0;
- }
-
- .figcenter {max-width: 100%; margin: 0 auto 0 auto;}
- img {max-height: 80%;}
-
- hr {
- margin-top: .1em;
- margin-bottom: .1em;
- visibility: hidden;
- color: white;
- width: .01em;
- display: none;
- }
-
- .blockquot {margin: 1.5em 3% 1.5em 3%;}
- .poetry-container {text-align: center;}
- .poetry {display: block; text-align: left; margin-left: 1.5em;}
- .poetry .stanza {page-break-inside: avoid;}
-
- .transnote {
- page-break-inside: avoid;
- margin-left: 2%;
- margin-right: 2%;
- margin-top: 1em;
- margin-bottom: 1em;
- padding: .5em;
- }
-
-}
-
- </style>
- </head>
-
-<body>
-<p style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Pictorial Beauty on the Screen, by Victor Oscar Freeburg</p>
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
-at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
-are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
-country where you are located before using this eBook.
-</div>
-
-<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Pictorial Beauty on the Screen</p>
- <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Victor Oscar Freeburg</p>
- <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Contributor: Rex Ingram</p>
-<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: August 12, 2021 [eBook #66049]</p>
-<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</p>
- <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; text-align:left'>Produced by: Charlene Taylor, Charlie Howard, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)</p>
-<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PICTORIAL BEAUTY ON THE SCREEN ***</div>
-
-<div class="transnote">
-<p class="center larger">Transcriber's Note</p>
-
-<p>Larger versions of most illustrations may be seen by right-clicking them
-and selecting an option to view them separately, or by double-tapping and/or
-stretching them.</p>
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_i">i</span></p>
-
-<h1>PICTORIAL BEAUTY ON THE SCREEN</h1>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div class="chapter"><div class="p4 center wspace smaller">
-<div id="if_i_001" class="figcenter b1" style="max-width: 12em;">
- <img src="images/i_001.png" width="582" height="204" alt="" /></div>
-
-<p>
-THE MACMILLAN COMPANY<br />
-
-<span class="smaller">NEW YORK · BOSTON · CHICAGO · DALLAS<br />
-ATLANTA · SAN FRANCISCO</span></p>
-
-<p>MACMILLAN &amp; CO., <span class="smcap">Limited</span><br />
-
-<span class="smaller">LONDON · BOMBAY · CALCUTTA<br />
-MELBOURNE</span></p>
-
-<p>THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, <span class="smcap">Ltd.</span><br />
-<span class="smaller">TORONTO</span>
-</p>
-</div></div>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="i_frontis" class="newpage figcenter" style="max-width: 45em;">
- <img src="images/i_003.jpg" width="2859" height="1653" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>The Covered Wagon</i>. The rich variety of light and shadow in this scene, combined with the simple strength
-of the moving pattern, makes it one of the most charming sections in a remarkable photoplay. See <a href="#Page_9">pages 9</a>, <a href="#Page_66">66</a> and <a href="#Page_140">140</a>.</div></div>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div class="chapter"><div class="newpage p2 center wspace vspace">
-<p class="xxlarge bold">
-PICTORIAL BEAUTY<br />
-ON THE SCREEN</p>
-
-<p class="p4">BY<br />
-
-<span class="large">VICTOR OSCAR FREEBURG, <span class="smcap">Ph.D.</span></span><br />
-
-AUTHOR OF “THE ART OF PHOTOPLAY MAKING,” AND<br />
-“DISGUISE PLOTS IN ELIZABETHAN DRAMA.”</p>
-
-<p class="p4"><span class="large">WITH A PREFATORY NOTE</span><br />
-<span class="smcap larger">By Rex Ingram</span></p>
-
-<p class="p4"><span class="bold">New York</span><br />
-<span class="larger">THE MACMILLAN COMPANY<br />
-1923</span><br />
-<span class="smaller"><i>All rights reserved</i></span>
-</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<p class="newpage p2 small">
-PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.</p>
-
-<p class="p4 small"><span class="smcap">Copyright, 1923,<br />
-By</span> THE MACMILLAN COMPANY.</p>
-
-<p class="small">Set up and electrotyped. Published October, 1923.</p>
-</div></div>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div class="newpage p4 center narrow vspace larger">
-<p>To<br />
-<span class="larger">JAMES CRUZE</span>
-</p>
-
-<p>Because the Various Types of Pictorial Beauty
-Described in this Book May Be Seen Richly
-Blended with Epic Narrative and Stirring Drama
-in “The Covered Wagon,” a Cinema Composition
-That Will Live</p>
-</div>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="PREFATORY_NOTE">PREFATORY NOTE</h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="p0 b2 center"><i>By</i> <span class="smcap">Rex Ingram</span>, <i>Director of the “Four Horsemen of
-the Apocalypse,” “Scaramouche,” etc., etc.</i></p>
-
-<p>In this volume Dr. Freeburg contends that in order
-to be classified among the Arts, the Cinema must become
-something more than a series of clear photographs
-of things in motion.</p>
-
-<p>In other words, a motion picture must be composed
-of scenes that have certain pictorial qualifications,
-such as form, composition, and a proper distribution
-of light and shade.</p>
-
-<p>It is chiefly according to the degree in which these
-qualities are present in a picture, that it can register
-the full effectiveness of its drama, characterizations
-and atmosphere.</p>
-
-<p>Dr. Freeburg handles his subject clearly and comprehensively,
-and I know that the majority who read
-this book will gain a great deal more enjoyment than
-previously from productions of the calibre of “Broken
-Blossoms,” “Dr. Caligari,” “Blind Husbands,” “Dr.
-Jekyll and Mr. Hyde,” “Nanook of the North,” and
-films more numerous than I can mention by such picture
-makers as Messrs. Griffith, Seastrom, Tourneur,
-Von Stroheim and Lubitsch.</p>
-
-<p class="sigright">
-<span class="smcap">Rex Ingram.</span>
-</p>
-
-<p class="in0 smaller">August 5th, 1923.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_ix">ix</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="AUTHORS_PREFACE">AUTHOR’S PREFACE</h2>
-</div>
-
-<p>If I look upon a motion picture as a kind of substitute
-for some stage play or novel, it seems to me a
-poor thing, only a substitute for something better;
-but if I look upon it as something real in itself, a
-new form of pictorial art in which things have somehow
-been conjured into significant motion, then I get
-many a glimpse of touching beauty, and I always see
-a great range of possibilities for richer beauties in
-future examples of this new art. Then I see the motion
-picture as the equal of any of the elder arts.</p>
-
-<p>In other words, I enjoy the movies as pictures, and
-I do not enjoy them as anything else but pictures. Yet
-it is on the pictorial side that the movies are now in
-greatest need of improvement. And this need will
-probably continue for at least another ten years. I
-feel that a book such as this may prove to be of considerable
-help in bringing about that improvement.
-So far as I know, this is the first book in which a
-systematic analysis of pictorial composition on the
-screen has been attempted, although there are certain
-earlier books in which the pictorial art of the screen
-has been appraised without analysis, the pioneer work
-in that class being Vachel Lindsay’s “Art of the Moving
-Picture.” The most original things in my present
-volume are to be found in the chapters on “Pictorial
-Motions”—or, at least, they ought to be there, else<span class="pagenum" id="Page_x">x</span>
-I am to blame, because that is the phase of cinematic
-art which has hitherto received the least attention
-from critics.</p>
-
-<p>“Movie fans” in general are my audience, my hope
-being that they may find something new in this discussion,
-something, here and there, which they had
-not themselves thought of, but which will help them
-toward a conscious and keen enjoyment of beauty
-scarcely observed before, and to a more certain discrimination
-between genuine art on the screen and
-mere pretentious imitations of art.</p>
-
-<p>In order not to confuse the issue, I have purposely
-omitted discussions of plot, dramatic situation, characterization,
-etc., except where these matters are so
-intimately connected with pictorial form that an omission
-would be impossible. In short, it is what the picture
-looks like, rather than what it tells, which here
-occupies our attention. This study is, therefore, supplementary
-to my book “The Art of Photoplay Making,”
-which is published by The Macmillan Company.</p>
-
-<p>Mr. James O. Spearing, who was for five years the
-distinguished motion picture critic on the <i>New York
-Times</i>, and is now on the production staff of the
-Goldwyn Pictures Corporation, has been kind enough
-to criticize the manuscript of the present work, and I
-take pride in thanking him publicly for having thus
-served me with his extensive knowledge and cultivated
-taste.</p>
-
-<p class="sigright">V. O. F.</p>
-
-<p class="p0 in0 smaller">The National Arts Club,<br />
-New York City,<br />
-August 27th, 1923.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_xi">xi</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CONTENTS">CONTENTS</h2>
-</div>
-
-<table id="toc" summary="Contents">
-<tr class="small">
- <td class="tdr top">CHAP.</td>
- <td> </td>
- <td class="tdr">PAGE</td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">I.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Pictorial Art in the Movies</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_1">1</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">II.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Practical Value of Pictorial Composition</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_9">9</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">III.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Eye Tests for Beauty</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_25">25</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">IV.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Pictorial Force in Fixed Patterns</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_50">50</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">V.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Rhythm and Repose in Fixed Design</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_68">68</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">VI.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Motions in a Picture</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_83">83</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">VII.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Pictorial Motions at Work</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_97">97</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">VIII.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Pictorial Motions at Play</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_116">116</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">IX.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Pictorial Motions at Rest</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_128">128</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">X.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Mastery in the Movies</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_154">154</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdr top">XI.</td>
- <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Mysterious Emotions of Art</span></td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#toclink_178">178</a></td>
-</tr>
-</table>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_xvi">xvi</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="LIST_OF_ILLUSTRATIONS">LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h2>
-</div>
-
-<table id="loi" summary="List of Illustrations">
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“The Covered Wagon.” Prairie Scene</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#i_frontis"><i>Frontispiece</i></a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr class="small">
- <td></td>
- <td class="tdr">FACING<br />PAGE</td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“The Plough Girl”</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_011">11</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“The Shepherdess.” By LeRolle</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_021">21</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“The Spell of the Yukon.” Cabin Scene</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_028a">28</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">A Study of Composition in “The Spell of the Yukon”</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_028b">28</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“Daylight and Lamplight.” By Paxton</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_039a">39</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">A Study of Lines</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_039b">39</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“Audrey”</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_045">45</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">A Still Illustrating Misplaced Emphasis</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_055a">55</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">A Specimen of Bad Composition</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_055b">55</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“The Spell of the Yukon.” Exterior</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_057">57</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">A Triangle Pattern</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_061">61</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“Derby Day.” By Rowlandson</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_064a">64</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">A Study of Composition in “Derby Day”</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_064b">64</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“Maria Rosa”</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_071">71</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“Mme. LeBrun and Her Daughter.” By Mme. LeBrun</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_076">76</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“Polly of the Circus”</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_079a">79</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“Banquet of the Officers of St. Andrew.” By Hals</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_079b">79</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“The Covered Wagon.” Arroyo Scene</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_093">93</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">A Typical Bad Movie Composition</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_100a">100</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“Sherlock Holmes”</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_100b">100</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“The Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse”</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_133">133</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“Portrait of Charles I.” By Van Dyck</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_163">163</a></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
- <td class="tdl">“The Cabinet of Dr. Caligari”</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#if_i_179">179</a></td>
-</tr>
-</table>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_1" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1">1</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Pictorial_Beauty_On_the_Screen"><span class="larger">Pictorial Beauty On the Screen</span></h2>
-
-<hr />
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">PICTORIAL ART IN THE MOVIES</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">Vast</span> armies of “movie fans” in massed formation
-move in and out of the theaters day after day and night
-after night. They may be trampled on, stumbled over,
-suffocated; they may have to wait wearily for seats
-and even for a glimpse of the screen, and yet they
-come, drawn by a lure which they never dream of
-denying. Yet the individuals in these crowds are not
-the helpless victims of mob impulses. Choose the
-average person among them, and you will find that he
-is able to criticize what he sees. He has developed no
-small degree of artistic taste during all the hundreds of
-nights which he has spent with eyes fixed upon the
-screen. He can, at least, tell the difference between a
-dull, common-place plot and one that is original and
-thrilling. He can distinguish between the reasonable
-and the ridiculous. He is perfectly aware that much of
-what he sees is plain “bunk,” that it is false, or silly,
-or of no consequence; and yet, after waiting patiently,
-he is quick to catch the honest message of significant
-truth when it comes. He is trained in the appreciation
-of screen acting, and does not confuse mere showy performance<span class="pagenum" id="Page_2">2</span>
-with sincere, sympathetic interpretation of a
-dramatic character. And now, at last, the “average
-movie fan” is beginning to demand that motion pictures
-have real pictorial beauty, that they be something more
-than clear photographs of things in motion.</p>
-
-<p>Here we have struck the measure of the motion picture’s
-possibilities as a new art. The masses who pay
-for tickets have the situation entirely in their hands.
-Photoplays are improving year by year principally because
-the public wants better photoplays year by year.
-When the movies were new, people were satisfied with
-novelties, mechanical tricks, sensational “stunts,” pictures
-of sensational people, pictures of pretty places,
-etc., but, although they appreciated what was called
-good photography, they expressed no craving for genuine
-pictorial beauty. Later on came the craze for adaptations
-of popular novels and stage plays to the screen.
-This was really a great step forward. The motion
-picture was no longer a mere toy or trick, but was being
-looked upon as a real art medium. The public had
-developed a taste for the exciting, clearly told story,
-and this demand was satisfied by hundreds of excellent
-photoplays—excellent, at least, according to the
-standards of the day. Yet the “fans” might have
-asked for more. They got the story of a famous novel
-or play, with fairly well acted interpretations by screen
-folk in proper costumes, and with scenes and settings
-that usually answered to the descriptions in the literary
-work adapted; they even got, here and there, a
-“pretty” view or a chance grouping of striking beauty,
-but they did not regularly get, or ask for, the kind of
-beauty which we are accustomed to find in the masterpieces
-of painting. But taste has been developed by<span class="pagenum" id="Page_3">3</span>
-tasting, and at last the craving for pictorial art has
-come.</p>
-
-<p>Along with this new public demand for better pictorial
-qualities in the motion pictures have come higher
-ideals to those who make and distribute motion pictures.
-The producers are awakening to their opportunities.
-They are no longer content with resurrecting defunct
-stage plays and picturizing them hurriedly, with
-only enough additions to the bare plot to make the
-photoplay last five reels. It is not now so much a
-question of fixing over something old, as of constructing
-something new. They are beginning to think in
-terms of pictorial motion. The directors, too—those
-who have not been forced out of the studios by their
-lack of ability—have learned their art of pictorial composition
-in much the same way as the public has developed
-its taste, that is, by experience. Once they
-seemed to think that it was enough to tell the heroine
-when to sob or raise her eyebrows; now they realize
-that the lines and pattern of the entire figure should
-be pictorially related to every other line and pattern
-which is to be recorded by the camera and shown upon
-the screen. And, finally, along with the director’s rise
-in power and importance is coming the better subordination
-of the “stars,” and yet they shine not the less
-brightly on the screen.</p>
-
-<p>The early exhibitors were often accused of being
-“ballyhoo” men, hawking their wares of more or less
-questionable character. Most of them, indeed, never
-suspected that motion pictures might contain beauty.
-Now the worst of them can at least be classed with
-picture dealers who value their goods because others
-love them, while the best, including such men as Dr.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_4">4</span>
-Hugo Riesenfeld, have made exhibition itself a new
-art. They select pictures with conscientious taste,
-place them in a harmonious program, and show them
-in a theatrical setting that gives the right mood for
-æsthetic appreciation on the part of the audience.</p>
-
-<p>Publicity men, too, have felt the temper of the public.
-Although they still like to exploit sensational features,
-the language of art is creeping into their “dope.”
-They are beginning to find phrases for the kind of
-beauty in a film which does not come from a ravishing
-“star” or the lavish expenditure of money. And
-the independent reviewers whose criticisms are published
-in the newspapers and magazines have become
-professional. There was a time when they contented
-themselves with listing the cast, revealing the plot in
-a paragraph, and adding that “the photography is
-excellent.” But now we find thoughtful, discriminating
-criticisms of photoplays in the film magazines and
-in the leading daily papers of the country. These
-critics have learned how to analyze the narrative as a
-dramatic construction, and how to evaluate the interpretation
-of character in the acting, but they have also
-learned something else, and this belongs to the new
-epoch in the development of the photoplay; they have
-begun to observe the pictorial art in motion pictures,
-the endless possibilities of beauty in the pictorial combination
-of figure, setting, and action; in the arrangement
-of lines and masses, of lights and shadows, and
-in the fascinating rhythms of movement on the screen.</p>
-
-<p>This conscious desire for beauty on the screen, which
-is springing up all along the line, from the producer
-to the ultimate “fan,” has naturally led to public discussion.
-In school room and church, on “lot” and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_5">5</span>
-“location,” in office and studio, in club or casual group,
-men and women are trying to find words and phrases
-to express the cinematic beauty which they have sensed.
-And by that discussion they are sharpening their senses
-for the discovery of richer beauty in the films that are
-to come. My contribution to that discussion has taken
-the form of this book, and my aim has been, first, to
-collect the topics which are connected with the purely
-pictorial side of the movies, and, second, to formulate
-my conception of some of the principles which govern
-the creation of pictorial beauty on the screen. I have
-endeavored to see my subject from various angles, assuming
-at times the position of the sensitive spectator
-and at times standing, as it were, beside the average
-director, and presuming to suggest to him what he
-ought to do to please that spectator.</p>
-
-<p>To begin with, let us take care to avoid some of the
-common pitfalls of photoplay criticism. It has been
-a common error to judge a photoplay as though it
-were a kind of visualized book. Many of us have
-slipped into the mistake of expecting motion photographs
-to give us the same kind of pleasure which
-we get from printed or spoken words. But let us understand
-from now on that the beauty of a design-and-motion
-art must of necessity be quite different
-from the beauty of a word-and-voice art.</p>
-
-<p>This means that we shall have to get out of the
-habit of using expressions like “He is <em>writing</em> a photoplay.”
-A writer might indeed devise a story for a
-motion picture play, as he might originate and describe
-an idea for a painting, but it would not in either case
-be proper to say that he had <em>written</em> the picture. This
-book is not a study of words, phrases, sentences, paragraphs,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_6">6</span>
-etc. It does not deal with literary expression.
-It deals with fixed and moving designs, the things
-which the spectator actually sees, the only forms which
-actually hold and present the contents of a photoplay.
-At times we shall, of course, be obliged to say something
-about the familiar “sub-titles,” which interrupt
-the pictorial flow in a film. But word-forms are not
-characteristic photoplay forms. Fundamentally, a
-photoplay is a sequence of motion pictures, and a man
-can no more write those pictures than he can write a
-row of paintings on a wall. However, it would be
-unfair to say that a writer could not in some way lend
-a hand in the making of a motion picture; we merely
-insist that the finished picture should not be judged as
-writing.</p>
-
-<p>We must also get rid of the notion that “photoplays
-are <em>acted</em>.” It would hardly be further from the
-truth to say that paintings are posed. A finished
-painting may, in fact, contain the image of some person
-who has posed for the artist; but the painting contains
-something else far more significant. We cannot
-thank Raphael’s model for the beauty of “The Sistine
-Madonna,” nor can we thank Charles I. of England
-for the beauty of Van Dyck’s portraits of him. Turning
-to movies, it must be admitted that actors are
-tremendously important, but it must not be said that
-they act motion pictures. They only act while motion
-pictures are being made. We cannot thank them for
-the poignant beauty of glowing lights and falling
-shadows, of flowing lines, and melting forms, and all
-that strange evanescence that makes up the lure of
-cinematic forms.</p>
-
-<p>Also we must reject the theory that the artistic<span class="pagenum" id="Page_7">7</span>
-quality of a photoplay can be guaranteed by engaging
-so-called art directors who design backgrounds or select
-natural settings for the action of the film story.
-The picture which we see on the screen consists not
-of backgrounds alone; it is rather an ever-varying design
-of moving figures combined with a fixed or changing
-background. If an art director limits his work to
-the preparation of material environment of photoplay
-action, he is, by definition, responsible only for the
-place-element in the motion picture. Even if he were
-to design costumes and general equipment for the
-players he would still be responsible for only a part of
-the pictorial elements that appear upon the screen.</p>
-
-<p>Plot, performers, places, equipment—these are only
-the materials which a picture-maker puts into cinematic
-forms. The art does not lie in the separate materials;
-it lies in the organization of those materials,
-a process which may be called cinema composition.<a id="FNanchor_1" href="#Footnote_1" class="fnanchor">A</a>
-In a later chapter we shall discuss the proposition that
-the motion picture director is, or certainly should be,
-the master cinema composer. Here we simply want
-to make the point that criticism should concern itself
-with the finished composition as a whole and not
-with the parts alone. The critic who is interested
-only in the plot construction of photoplays may indeed
-be able to make penetrating comment upon such
-dramatic qualities as suspense, logic, etc., but he cannot
-thereby give us any information on those visual
-aspects which please or displease the eye while the
-picture is showing. Thus also the critic who looks only<span class="pagenum" id="Page_8">8</span>
-at the acting in the photoplay is likely to be misled and
-to mislead us. He may not observe, for example, that
-a film which has bad joining of scenes, or a bad combination
-of figure and setting, is a bad cinema composition,
-however superb the acting may be. And the
-critic who writes, “The photography is excellent,”—a
-rubber-stamp criticism—is of no help to art-lovers,
-because the photography as such may indeed be excellent
-while the composition of the scenes photographed
-is atrocious. Cinema criticism, to be of any real value
-to the “movie fan,” must be complete. And that means
-that he must be enlightened concerning the nature of
-pictorial design and pictorial progression, as well as
-concerning the plot, the acting, and the mechanics of
-photography.</p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-
-<p><a id="Footnote_1" href="#FNanchor_1" class="fnanchor">A</a> The terms “cinema composer” and “cinema composition” were
-devised by the author in 1916, at the time when he and his students
-founded the Cinema Composers Club at Columbia University.</p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>All of us are beginners in this pioneer work of
-analyzing the motion picture as a design-and-motion
-art. But the prize is well worth the adventure. Certainly
-the danger of making mistakes need not alarm
-us unduly, for even a mistake may be interesting and
-helpful. At the start we need to sharpen our insight
-by learning as much about the grammar of pictorial
-art as we know about the grammar of language,
-by respecting the logic of line and tone as highly as
-the logic of fictitious events, by paying tribute to
-originality in the pattern of pictorial motions no
-less than to the novelty in fresh dramatic situations.
-Beyond that the prospect is alluring. Our new
-understanding will give us greater enjoyment of
-the pictorial beauty which even now comes to the
-screen, and the rumor of that enjoyment, sounding
-through the studios, will assure of us of still greater
-beauty in the future.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_9" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">9</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">THE PRACTICAL VALUE OF PICTORIAL COMPOSITION</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">The</span> production manager of a large motion picture
-studio in New York once declared to the author that
-he was “against artistry in the movies because it usually
-spoils the picture.” “Emotion’s what gets ’em, not
-art,” he added. “Besides, a director has to shoot thirty
-or forty scenes a day, and hasn’t got any time to fool
-away with art notions.”</p>
-
-<p>Any one who has seen “The Covered Wagon” (directed
-by James Cruze for the Famous Players-Lasky
-Corporation) knows that such talk is nonsense. This
-remarkable photoplay charms the eye, appeals to the
-imagination, and stirs the emotions—all in the same
-“shot.” One can never forget the pictorial beauty in
-those magnificent expanses of barren prairie, traversed
-by the long train of covered wagons, a white line
-winding in slow rhythm, while a softly rising cloud of
-dust blends the tones of the curving canvas tops and
-of the wind-blown sage brush. Again and again the
-wagon train becomes a striking pictorial motif, and,
-whether it is seen creeping across the prairie, following
-the bank of a river, climbing toward a pass in the
-mountains, stretching out, a thin black chain of silhouettes
-on the horizon, curving itself along the palisade-like
-walls of an arroyo, or halted in snow against
-a background of Oregon pines, it always adds emphasis<span class="pagenum" id="Page_10">10</span>
-to the intense drama of the pioneers battling against
-the hardships of the trail in ’48 and ’49. Here is entrancing
-change and flow of pattern, but here is human
-striving and performance, too; and the emotions of
-the audience are touched more directly and more
-deeply because picture and drama have been fused
-into a single art.</p>
-
-<p>Shortly after “The Covered Wagon” had opened
-in New York an executive of a certain film company
-was heard to remark, “Well, no wonder it’s a success.
-It cost $700,000 to make it! Any one could
-take that much money and make a great picture.” I
-consider that reflection highly unjust and the argument
-entirely fallacious. Good pictorial composition
-does not necessarily cost a cent more than bad composition.
-In fact, it will be shown in the following
-chapters that a scene of cinematic beauty often costs
-less than an ordinary arrangement of the same scene.</p>
-
-<p>The pictorial beauty discussed in this book is really
-a kind of pictorial efficiency, and therefore must have
-practical, economic value. When a motion picture is
-well composed it pleases the eye, its meaning is easily
-understood, and the emotion it contains is quickly and
-forcefully conveyed. In short, it has the power of
-art.</p>
-
-<p>Pictorial efficiency cannot be bought. It cannot
-be guaranteed by the possession of expensive cameras
-and other mechanical equipment. The camera has no
-sense, no soul, no capacity for selecting, emphasizing,
-and interpreting the pictorial subject for the benefit
-of the spectator. In fact, the camera is positively
-stupid, because it always shows more than is necessary;
-it often emphasizes the wrong thing, and it is<span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">11</span>
-notoriously blind to beautiful significance. You who
-carry kodaks for the purpose of getting souvenirs of
-your travels have perhaps often been surprised, when
-the films were developed, to discover some very conspicuous
-object, ugly and jarring, which you had not
-noticed at the time when the picture was taken. At
-that time your mind had forced your eye to ignore
-all that was not interesting and beautiful, but the
-camera had made no such choice.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_011" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 33em;">
- <img src="images/i_011.jpg" width="2092" height="1670" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>The Plough Girl</i>. The pictorial composition at this moment of the action is
-bad because the spectator’s eye is not led instantly to the book, which is the most important
-dramatic interest in this scene. See <a href="#Page_11">page 11</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>It will not help matters to buy a better lens for
-your camera and to be more careful of the focus next
-time. Such things can only make the images more
-sharp; they cannot alter the emphasis. Unfortunately
-there are still movie makers, and movie “fans,” too,
-in the world who have the notion that sharpness of
-photography, or “clearness,” as they call it, is a wonderful
-quality. But such people do not appreciate
-art; they merely appreciate machinery. To make the
-separate parts of a picture more distinct does not
-help us to see the total meaning more clearly. It may,
-in fact, prevent us from seeing.</p>
-
-<p>Let us look, for example, at the “still” reproduced
-on the opposite page. The picture is clear enough.
-We observe that it contains three figures and about
-a dozen objects. Our attention is caught by a conspicuous
-lamp, whose light falls upon a suspicious-looking
-jug, with its stopper not too tightly in. Yet
-these objects, emphasized as they are, have but slight
-importance indeed when compared with the book
-clutched in the man’s hand.</p>
-
-<p>This mistake in emphasis is not the fault of the
-camera; it is the fault of the director, who in the
-haste, or ignorance, perhaps, of days gone by, composed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">12</span>
-the picture so badly that the spectators are
-forced to look first at the wrong things, thus wasting
-time and energy before they can find the right things.
-On the screen, to be sure, the book attracts some
-attention because it is in motion, yet that does not
-suffice to draw our attention immediately away from
-the striking objects in the foreground. The primary
-interests should, of course, have been placed in the
-strongest light and in the most prominent position.</p>
-
-<p>Guiding the attention of the spectator properly
-helps him to understand what he is looking at, but it is
-still more important to help him feel what he is looking
-at. Movie producers used to have a great deal to
-say about the need of putting “punch” into a picture,
-of making it so strong that it would “hit the audience
-between the eyes.” Well, let those hot injunctions
-still be given. We maintain that good composition
-will make any motion picture “punch” harder, and
-that bad composition will weaken the “punch,” may,
-indeed, prevent its being felt at all. But before arguing
-that proposition, let us philosophize a bit over the
-manner in which a “punch” operates on our minds.</p>
-
-<p>Anything that impresses the human mind through
-the eye requires a three-fold expenditure of human
-energy. There is, first, the physical exertion of <em>looking</em>,
-then the mental exertion of <em>seeing</em>, that is, understanding
-what one looks at, and, finally, the joy of
-<em>feeling</em>, the pouring out of emotional energy. This
-last is the “punch,” the result which every artist aims
-to produce; but it can only be achieved through the
-spectator’s enjoyment of looking and seeing.</p>
-
-<p>Now, since the total human energy available at any
-one time for looking, seeing, and feeling is limited, it<span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">13</span>
-is clearly desirable to economize in the efforts of looking
-and seeing, in order to leave so much the more
-energy for emotional enjoyment. We shall discuss
-in the following chapter some of the things which
-waste our energies during the efforts of looking and
-seeing. Let us here consider how pictorial composition
-can control the expenditure of emotional energy,
-and how it may thus either help or hinder the spectator
-in his appreciation of beauty on the screen.</p>
-
-<p>Let us imagine an example of a typical “punch”
-picture and describe it here in words—inadequate
-though they may be—to illustrate how a bad arrangement
-of events and scenes may use up the spectator’s
-emotional energy before the story arrives at the
-event intended to furnish the main thrill. The “punch”
-in this case is to be the transfer of a man from one
-airplane to another. But many other things will disturb
-us on the way, and certain striking scenes will
-rob the aerial transfer of its intended “punch.”</p>
-
-<p>First we see the hero and his pilot just starting their
-flight in a hydro-airplane, the dark compact machine
-contrasting strongly with the magnificent spread of
-white sails of a large sloop yacht—perhaps thus tending
-to focus our attention on the yacht—which skims
-along toward the left of our view.</p>
-
-<p>Then, in the next scene, near some country village,
-evidently miles away from the expanse of water in the
-first picture, we see a huge Caproni triplane, which
-must have made a forced landing in the muddy creek
-of a pasture. A herd of Holstein cows with strange
-black and white markings, two bare-footed country
-girls, a shepherd dog, and five helmeted mechanicians,
-stand helpless, all equally admiring and dumb, while<span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">14</span>
-an alert farmer hitches an amusing span of mules, one
-black and one gray, to the triplane and drags it out
-of the mud.</p>
-
-<p>The third scene is strange indeed. It looks at first
-like a dazzling sea of foam—perhaps the ocean
-churned to fury by a storm—no, you may not believe
-it, but it is a sea of clouds. We are in an airplane
-of our own high in the sky, perhaps miles and miles,
-or maybe only three-quarters of a mile, above sea level.
-Just as we become fascinated by the nests of shadows
-among the cloud billows, a black object swings up
-from the whiteness, like a dolphin or a submarine from
-the sea. It is the hydro-airplane with our hero and
-his pilot; we recognize them because they are now
-sailing abreast of us only a few yards away. The
-hero stands up and is about to assume the pose of
-Washington crossing the Delaware, a difficult thing
-in such a strong wind when he is suddenly struck
-from behind by a villain who evidently had concealed
-himself in the body of the hydro-airplane before the
-flight was started. The villain is dressed like a soldier
-and seems to have a knapsack on his back.</p>
-
-<p>Meanwhile, the sea of clouds flows by, dazzling
-white and without a rift through which one might
-look to see whether a city, an ocean, a forest, or a
-cornfield lies below.</p>
-
-<p>Suddenly we look upward and discover the triplane,
-silhouetted sharply against the sky like the
-skeleton of some monster. It has five bodies and the
-five propellors, which three or four minutes ago were
-paralyzed in the cow pasture, now are revolving so
-rapidly that we cannot see them. It would be very interesting—but
-look! the villain and the hero are having<span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">15</span>
-a little wrestling match on one of the wings of
-their plane. Let us hope the hero throws the villain
-into the clouds! He does, too! But villains are
-deucedly clever. The knapsack turns into a parachute,
-which spreads out into a white circular form,
-more circular than any of the clouds. We wonder if
-there will be any one to meet him when he lands—but,
-don’t miss it! This is the “punch”! The triplane
-is flying just above the hydro-airplane. Somebody
-lets down a rope ladder, which bends back like the
-tail of a kite. The hero grabs it, grins at the camera,
-climbs up, and with perfect calmness asks for a cigarette,
-though he doesn’t light it, because that would be
-against the pilot’s rules.</p>
-
-<p>Well, the transfer from one airplane to another
-wasn’t so much of a “punch,” after all.</p>
-
-<p>Now let us count the thrills of such a picture as
-they might come to us from the screen. First, in order
-of time, would be our delight at the stately curves of
-the gleaming sails of the yacht, but this delight would
-be dulled somewhat by the physical difficulty experienced
-by the eyes in following the swaying, thrusting
-movement of the yacht as it heels from the breeze, and
-at the same time following the rising shape of the
-hydro-airplane; and it would be further dulled by the
-mental effort of trying to see the dramatic relation
-between yacht and plane. But, whether dulled or
-not, this thrill would be all in vain, for it surely does
-not put more force into the “punch” which we set
-out to produce, namely, the transfer of a man from one
-airplane to another.</p>
-
-<p>The yacht, therefore, being unnecessary to our
-story, violates the principle of unity; it violates the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">16</span>
-principles of emphasis and balance, because it distracts
-our attention from the main interest; and it
-violates the principle of rhythm, because it does not
-take a part in the upward-curving succession of interests
-that should culminate with the main “punch.”</p>
-
-<p>If the plane of our hero must rise from the water,
-and if there is to be a secondary interest in the picture,
-let it be something which, though really subordinate,
-can intensify our interest in the plane. Perhaps
-a clumsy old tug would serve the purpose, its
-smoke tracing a barrier, above which the plane soars
-as easily as a bird. Or perhaps a rowboat would be
-just as well, with a fisherman gazing spellbound at
-the machine that rises into the air. Either of these
-elements would emphasize the idea of height and
-danger.</p>
-
-<p>The scene of the triplane in the pasture with the
-cows, mules, etc., might be mildly amusing. But our
-eyes would be taxed by its moving spots, and, since
-its tones would be dark or dark gray, the pupils of
-our eyes would become dilated, and would therefore
-be totally unprepared for the flash of white which follows
-in the next scene.</p>
-
-<p>The white expanse of fleecy clouds would shock
-the eyes at first sight, since the approach to the subject
-had not been properly made; but in a moment we
-would be stirred by the feeling that we were really
-above the clouds. We would seem to have passed
-into a new world with floods of mist. The long
-stretches of white are soft as eiderdown, yet, because
-of our own motion, they seem like the currents of a
-broad river, and one can almost imagine that it were
-possible to steer a canoe over those rapids. All this<span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">17</span>
-would be the second thrill, beautiful in itself but not
-actually tending to emphasize the “punch” of a man
-transferring from one airplane to another.</p>
-
-<p>The third thrill would surely come when the hydro-airplane
-swings up through these clouds, like a dolphin
-from the sea, and yet not like a dolphin, because
-it rises more slowly and in a few moments soars freely
-into the air, a marvellous happening which no words
-can describe. Yet this thrill, like the others, would
-exhaust our emotions rather than leave them fresh
-for the “punch” we started out to produce, the transfer
-of a man from one airplane to another.</p>
-
-<p>Most thrilling of all would be the moments between
-the instant when the villain is pushed off the wing of
-the plane and the instant when his parachute snaps
-open. The white mass of the parachute, almost like
-a tiny cloud, spreads out at the instant when it reaches
-the layer of clouds, as if they pushed it open; then the
-parachute sinks into the clouds and dies out like a
-wave of the sea.</p>
-
-<p>After all these thrills, the intended “punch” would
-come like a slap on the wrist. A man might now leap
-back and forth from one airplane to another until it
-was time to go home for supper, and we would only
-yawn at his exploits.</p>
-
-<p>Now one of the morals of this story is that we
-did get a “punch,” even though it was not the one
-originally intended by our imagined producer. Treasures
-often lie in unsuspected places. Nearly every
-common-place film on the screen contains some beauty
-by accident, some unexpected charm, some unforseen
-“punch,” something the director never dreamed of,
-which outshines the very beauty which he aimed to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">18</span>
-produce. And whenever a thoughtful person is stirred
-by such accidental beauty he is delighted to think that
-such a thing is possible. In the exceptional films, he
-knows, such effects are produced by design instead
-of by chance. It is better business, and it is better
-art.</p>
-
-<p>We said at the beginning of this chapter that it
-was clearly desirable to economize the spectator’s
-efforts of looking and seeing, in order that he may
-have the greatest possible amount of energy left for
-the experience of emotion. This is desirable even from
-a business man’s point of view. We shall now try
-to show that emotional thrills can actually be controlled
-by design, by what we shall call pictorial composition.</p>
-
-<p>But how is pictorial composition controlled, and
-who controls it? How far is the scenario writer responsible
-for pictorial value? How much of the pictorial
-composition shall the director direct, and how
-much of it may safely be left to other hands? And,
-if a picture is well composed, does that guarantee
-beauty? The answers to these questions depend upon
-our definition of terms.</p>
-
-<p>Composition in general means, of course, simply
-bringing things together into a mutual relation. A
-particular combination of parts in a picture may help
-the spectator, or may hinder him more than some other
-possible combination of the same parts. Composition
-is form, and as such should be revealing and expressive
-at the same time that it is appealing in itself.
-Good composition cannot easily be defined in a
-single sentence, but, for the sake of order in our discussion,
-I wish to offer the following as my working<span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">19</span>
-definition. The best cinema composition is that arrangement
-of elements in a scene or succession of
-scenes which enables us to see the most with the least
-difficulty and the deepest feeling.</p>
-
-<p>A remarkable thing about composition is that it
-cannot be avoided. Every picture must have some
-kind of arrangement, whether that arrangement be
-good, bad, or indifferent. As soon as an actor enters
-a room he makes a composition, because every gesture,
-every movement, every line of his body bears some
-pictorial relation to everything else within range of
-our vision. Even to draw a single line or to prick a
-single point upon a sheet of paper is to start a composition,
-because such a mark must bear some relation
-to the four unavoidable lines which are described by
-the edges of the paper.</p>
-
-<p>To place a flower in a vase is to make a composition.
-If the arrangement contains more meaning,
-more significance than the exhibition of the flower
-and the vase separately, and if this meaning can easily
-be perceived, the composition is good. A bad composition
-would doubtless result if we placed the flower
-and vase together in front of a framed photograph,
-because the three things would not fuse together into
-a unity which contained more meaning than the things
-had separately. In fact, even the separate values
-would be lost, because the vase would obscure the
-photograph, which in turn would distract our attention
-from the vase. In other words, the arrangement
-would not help us to see much with ease.</p>
-
-<p>On the other hand, to place the flower and vase
-against some hanging or panel which harmonizes with
-them in color and emphasizes the beauty of the flower,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">20</span>
-is good composition, providing the rest of the environment
-is in harmony. The vase must, of course, stand
-on something, perhaps a table or a mantel-piece. This
-support must have shape, lines, color and texture, all
-visual elements which must be skillfully wrought into
-our design if the composition is to be successful. We
-see, therefore, that the artistic arrangement of simple
-things which do not move, which stay where you put
-them, is by no means a simple matter.</p>
-
-<p>What we have just described may be called composition
-in a general sense, but it represents only the
-initial process in pictorial composition. The picture
-maker’s work only begins with the arranging of the
-subject. It does not end until he has recorded that
-subject in some permanent form, such as a painting,
-a drawing, or a celluloid negative. In the recording,
-or treatment, the painter tries to improve the composition
-of his subject. He changes the curves of the
-vase and the flower somewhat in order to obtain a
-more definite unity. He softens the emphasis in one
-place and heightens it in another. He balances shape
-against shape. He swings into the picture a rhythm of
-line and tone which he hopes may express to some beholder
-the harmony which he, the artist, feels. In
-other words, the painter begins by arranging things,
-he continues by altering the aspects of those things
-until they fit his conception of the perfect picture of
-the subject before him, and he finishes the composition
-only when he leaves a permanent record of what he
-has seen and felt.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_021" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 41em;">
- <img src="images/i_021.jpg" width="2561" height="1629" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><i>The Shepherdess</i>, a painting by LeRolle, illustrating several principles of design which can be effectively
-used in photoplays. See <a href="#Page_55">page 55</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>Now it is evident that the painter might begin,
-without an actual flower or vase or panel or table, by
-merely arranging his mental images of those things.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">21</span>
-But the process would, of course, still be composition.
-If, for example, he were to say to himself “To-morrow
-I shall paint a picture of a rose in a slate-blue
-vase standing on an antique oak table backed by
-a gray panel,” that very arrangement of images in
-his mind would be the first phase of his composition.
-Or if a customer were to come to him and say “To-morrow
-I want you to paint for me a picture of a
-rose,” etc., the process of bringing things together
-would still be composition; only in that case it begins
-with the customer and is completed by the painter.</p>
-
-<p>If we apply this reasoning to the movies it is clear
-that as soon as a scenario writer writes a single line
-saying that a hydro-airplane takes off from the sea,
-he has already started a pictorial composition. Although
-he may not realize it, he has already brought
-together the long straight line of the horizon, the short
-curving lines of the waves, and the short straight and
-oblique lines of the plane. He has already made it
-necessary to combine certain tonal values of airplane
-and sky and sea, though he may not have stopped to
-consider what those tonal values might be.</p>
-
-<p>But the writer does other things of greater consequence
-than the combining of shapes and tonal values.
-He prescribes motions and locomotions of things, and
-he orders the succession of scenes. Even if he writes
-only that “a plane rises from the sea,” he makes necessary
-the combination of a great number of movements.
-On the screen that plane will have at least four
-movements, namely, rising, tilting, going toward the
-right or the left, and the movement of diminishing
-size. And the sea will have at least three movements,
-namely, undulation, flowing, and the movement of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">22</span>
-wake. Now if the scenario writer adds something
-else to the same scene, or prescribes the mutual relation
-of things and movements which are to appear in
-the next scene, he is, of course, merely continuing the
-process of cinema composition.</p>
-
-<p>Insofar as the writer makes the combination of
-these things essential to the story he circumscribes the
-power, he may even tie the hands, of the director.
-For the latter, unless he ignores the composition thus
-begun, can do only one thing with it; he can only carry
-it on.</p>
-
-<p>Now it is a sad thing to relate that many scenario
-writers do not suspect the truth of what we have just
-said. Some of them are evidently unaware of the
-significant fact that their description is really a prescription,
-that even by their written words they are
-really drawing the first lines of hundreds of pictures,
-that they are actually engaged in pictorial composition.
-They may be without knowledge of graphic art
-and without skill. They may not be able to take a
-pencil or a piece of charcoal and sketch out a horse or
-a hut or the general aspect of a single pictorial moment
-as it would appear on the screen. They may
-never have given any thought to the question of how
-best to arrange simultaneous or successive movements
-in order to give the strongest emotional appeal to the
-spectator. Yet they are drawing screen pictures, and
-drawing them on the typewriter!</p>
-
-<p>Of course, even the most intelligent scenario
-writers, even those who have the most accurate knowledge
-of pictorial values on the screen and the keenest
-power of visualizing their story as it will appear after
-it has been screened, are always handicapped by working<span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">23</span>
-in the medium of language. Words are not motion-photographs,
-any more than they are paint or
-marble. This is the scenario writer’s handicap. But,
-though we may sympathize with him because of the
-handicap, we cannot relieve him of responsibility as
-the designer of beginnings in the cinema composition.</p>
-
-<p>The director has a handicap, too. He also does not
-work in the medium of motion photographs. He cannot
-do so. Even if he were to look through the view-finder
-of the motion picture camera during the entire
-taking of every scene, he would not see exactly what
-we are destined to see in the theater. He would see
-things only in miniature, in a glass some two inches
-square, instead of larger than life. He would see
-things, not in black and white, but in their true colors.
-And he can never, under any circumstance, behold two
-or more scenes directly connected, with no more than
-the wink of an eye between them, until after the negatives
-have been developed, positives printed, and the
-strips spliced together in the cutting and joining room.</p>
-
-<p>In other words, neither the scenario writer nor the
-motion picture director can ever know definitely in
-advance just what the finished work will look like to
-us in the theater. If we are aware of these handicaps,
-it may help us to understand why ugliness so often
-slips through to the screen, but it will not permit us
-to tolerate that ugliness. We, as spectators and critics,
-must forever insist that the photoplay makers master
-their art, no matter how difficult the mastery may be.</p>
-
-<p>It was held some years ago that the only thing the
-matter with the movies was that the stories were badly
-composed and of little originality. Hence, a number
-of prominent novelists and playwrights were hired to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_24">24</span>
-adapt their own literary work or prepare new stories
-for the screen. But these literary men were among
-the first to discover that better <em>writing</em> does not in itself
-guarantee better <em>pictures</em>. It is the director who
-is more truly the picture maker than any one of his
-collaborators in the work. Ideally, he should prepare
-his own scenario, just as the painter makes his own
-preliminary sketches, and the fiction writer makes his
-own first draught of a story. Ideally, too, the plot
-should be devised by the director (who might then
-truly be called a cinema composer), devised especially
-for motion pictures, and with peculiar qualities and
-appeals that could never so well be expressed in other
-mediums.</p>
-
-<p>But that is an ideal to be dreamed of. And, meanwhile,
-we “movie fans” can enjoy the best that is
-being produced by collaborative methods, and we can
-help toward the achievement of still better things by
-developing a thorough appreciation of what is pictorially
-pleasing, at the same time that we train ourselves
-to detect and talk out of existence the common faults
-of the movies.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_25" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">25</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">EYE TESTS FOR BEAUTY</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">Do the</span> movies hurt your eyes? Some say “yes” and
-some say “no.” Why is it that photoplay scenes sometimes
-flash and dazzle, but have neither radiance nor
-sparkle? Why is it that the motions sometimes shown
-on the screen get “on your nerves”? Why is it that
-you look at so much on the screen and remember so
-little? These questions can be answered by making
-certain eye tests for beauty, and, having answered
-them, we may proceed to a detailed discussion of pictorial
-composition in a great variety of cases.</p>
-
-<p>In order to understand how the pleasure of pictorial
-beauty comes to a spectator, we must analyze the processes
-of looking and seeing. These processes consist
-partly of eye-work and partly of brain-work. That
-is, the physical eye must do certain work before the
-brain gets the visual image. Now if the physical eye
-has to work too hard, or bear a sudden strain, or
-undergo excessive wear, it will not function well; and,
-consequently, the brain will have to work harder in
-order to grasp the picture. All this causes displeasure,
-and displeasure is in conflict with beauty.</p>
-
-<p>Let us state, once for all, that motion pictures need
-never hurt the eyes—quite the contrary. Yet we have<span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">26</span>
-often seen photoplays that did hurt the eyes. Some
-of the reasons for this will be given in the following
-paragraphs.</p>
-
-<p>A familiar operation of the physical eye is the contraction
-and dilation of the pupil. We know from
-childhood that the pupil grows large when the light is
-weak, and small when the light is strong. We also
-know that the eye cannot make this adjustment instantly.
-If a strong light is suddenly flashed on us,
-for example, when we lie awake in a dark room it
-dazzles us, because our pupils are adjusted for darkness;
-it even hurts so much that we defend ourselves
-by closing the eyelids.</p>
-
-<p>In exactly the same way our eyes are shocked by
-the movies when a dazzling white light is flashed on
-the screen where a somewhat darkened scene has just
-vanished. The pupil is caught unawares, is not instantly
-able to protect the eye, and, besides, must use
-up a certain amount of energy in adapting itself to
-the new condition. Such a shock once or twice during
-the evening might easily be forgiven and forgotten,
-might, in fact, be hardly felt at the time; but fifty such
-shocks in a five-reel photoplay would certainly weary
-the eye, and a play of that sort could hardly be called
-beautiful.</p>
-
-<p>The fault which we have just named lies in the
-joining of scenes. But it is not, as a rule, necessary
-to connect scenes or sections of a film so that there is
-a jump from the darkest dark to the whitest white,
-or vice versa. This can be avoided, of course, by the
-device of “fading out” one scene and “fading in” the
-next, which gives the eye time to adapt itself, or by
-“fading down” or “up” just far enough to match the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">27</span>
-exact tone of the next picture. The shock can also
-be avoided by joining various sections of the film in
-a series of steps of increasing brightness or darkness.</p>
-
-<p>The eye is hurt, we have said, by a sharp succession
-of black and white. It is also hurt by a sharp
-contrast of whites and blacks lying side by side on the
-screen. Such extremes are avoided in paintings. The
-next time you are in an art museum please compare
-the brightest white in any portrait with the white of
-your cuff, or your handkerchief, or a piece of paper.
-You may be surprised to discover that the high light
-in that painting is not severely white. It is rather
-grayish or yellowish, soft and easy to the eye. Observe
-also that the darkest hue in that painting is far
-from the deepest possible black. The extremes of tone
-are, in fact, never very far apart, and are therefore
-easily grasped by the eye without undue strain.</p>
-
-<p>And while you are thinking of this practice of
-painters, you might compare it with the similar practice
-of composers of music. Your piano has many
-keys, the highest one in the treble being extremely
-far from the lowest one in the bass. Yet if you examine
-the score of any single piece of music you will
-discover that the highest note in that piece is not so
-very far from the lowest note in the same piece. It
-might have been possible to use the entire keyboard,
-but the composer has been wise enough not to try it.
-His extreme notes are so near together that the ear
-is able to catch them and all the subtle values of the
-music in between, without being strained by the effort.</p>
-
-<p>It seems, therefore, that in artistic matters moderation
-is a good thing, is, in fact, necessary to produce
-real beauty. But moderation in the movies is not yet<span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">28</span>
-a widely accepted gospel. Too often we find that the
-dazzling flood of rays from a strong searchlight
-blazes over several square yards of the silver screen,
-while at the same moment, on adjoining parts of the
-same screen hang the deep shades of night. The contrasts
-are sharp as lightning, not only in the scenes,
-but also in the sub-titles which are cut in between.
-Our eyes gaze and twitch and hurt, until it is a real
-relief to step out and rest them upon something comparatively
-moderate, like the electric signs on Broadway.</p>
-
-<p>If there were some mechanical difficulty which made
-this clashing effect of the motion pictures necessary,
-we could never hope for beauty on the screen; for
-no art can achieve beauty by producing pain. But we
-know from the work of such directors as James Cruze,
-D. W. Griffith, Allan Dwan, Rex Ingram, and John
-Robertson, that the moving picture camera is capable
-of recording light gray and dark gray, as well as steel
-white and ebony. They have shown us that it is possible
-to produce sub-titles with light gray lettering
-against a dark gray ground, and that such a combination
-of tones is pleasing to the eye. They have shown
-us that it is possible to screen a lady of the fairest
-face and dressed in the snowiest gown so as to bring
-out the softest tones of light and shade, yet show
-nothing as dazzling as snow and nothing as black as
-ebony.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_028a" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 27em;">
- <img src="images/i_028a.jpg" width="1710" height="1335" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>The Spell of the Yukon</i>. An interesting example of <em>chiaroscuro</em>
-and the harmonizing of dramatic pantomime with pictorial pattern.
-The composition, however, is slightly marred by over-emphasis
-on the window. See <a href="#Page_55">pages 55</a> and <a href="#Page_63">63</a>.</div></div>
-
-<div id="if_i_028b" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 28em;">
- <img src="images/i_028b.png" width="1779" height="1364" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">A study of the “still” shown above, illustrating a simple method
-of analyzing pictorial composition. See <a href="#Page_63">page 63</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>Some of the “stills” in this book give a hint of the
-sharp contrasts in the inferior films, but it is only a
-hint, because the white portions in those illustrations
-can be no whiter than the paper of the page, which is
-dull in comparison with the blaze on the screen. The<span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">29</span>
-movie theater is the best place to verify the theories
-which we are here trying to explain in words. Go to
-the movies. Whenever you find that you enjoy the
-films thoroughly, then by all means do not stop to
-analyze or criticise. If you enjoy any particular film
-so much that you are sure you would like to see it two
-or three times every year for the rest of your life,
-you may be happy, for you have discovered one of
-the classics of the screen. Do not analyze that film
-either, unless you are in the business of making pictures.
-But if a film makes you uncomfortable, or if
-it is so bad that you are quite disgusted with it, then,
-though you must become a martyr to do it, please stay
-and see it again. Compare the good parts of the film,
-if there are any, with the bad parts; study it in detail
-until you see where the trouble lies. And when you
-have discovered the real causes of ugliness in that
-film, wouldn’t it be a public service to express your
-opinion in such a way that the manager of your theater
-might hear it?</p>
-
-<p>Thus far in this chapter we have discussed only a
-single operation of the eye, namely, the expanding and
-contracting of the pupils under the effect of darkness
-and brightness, but it is easy to understand now how
-such an apparently slight thing may seriously affect
-our enjoyment of the movies. Let the reader, when
-he is next displeased by a picture, test it for sharpness
-of contrast between white and black. He will
-probably not have to seek further for explanation of
-its ugliness.</p>
-
-<p>Another operation which the eye-machine performs
-is the accommodation to color. It is somewhat similar
-to the accommodation to distance, which we shall describe,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">30</span>
-if the reader will help us by making an experiment.
-Close one eye and look steadily with the other
-at an object across the room. Now, without changing
-your gaze, hold up your finger in line with this
-object and about a foot away from your eye. The
-outline of the finger will be indistinct as long as you
-keep the eye focused on the remote object. Now,
-still keeping one eye shut, look at your finger until
-you can see the little ridges on it. The eye has changed
-its focus, and the remote object is now indistinct.
-What happens is that the lens within the eye changes
-its shape, bulging more for near objects and flattening
-again for distant objects. This work of the eye,
-called accommodation, is done by certain delicate
-muscles. A little of it may be stimulating, but too
-much will make the eyes tired.</p>
-
-<p>Now it is a strange thing that certain colors affect
-the eyes in the same way as distances. Painters knew
-this fact for hundreds of years before the scientists
-were able to explain the reason. They knew that blue
-seemed farther away than red, and arranged the colors
-in their paintings accordingly. All artists have learned
-the trick, even some of our commercial artists, who
-make advertising posters for street cars. Blue makes
-the background fall back; red makes a figure stand
-forward. The reason for this illusion is that when
-the eye looks at red it adjusts itself exactly as if it
-were looking at a near object, and thus deceives the
-brain, so to speak; and when it looks at blue it adjusts
-itself as if it were looking at a distant object and
-again deceives the brain. Or, to state the fact more
-completely, a color from the red end of the color scale
-(red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet) seems<span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">31</span>
-nearer to the eye than one from the violet end, even
-though the colors are all placed equally distant from
-the eye.</p>
-
-<p>Now we shall see that, although these effects of
-color are useful in a painting, they may be harmful
-in a motion picture. When we behold a painting in
-which colors ranging from red to yellow are contrasted
-with colors ranging from violet to blue, we
-may, indeed, get a pleasant sensation of the eye because
-of the stimulating activity in the work of
-accommodation. There is to most people a distinct
-pleasure, for example, in shifting the gaze from orange-yellow
-to blue, because those colors are felt to be
-“complementary.” But it must be remembered that
-the circumstances of looking at a painting are entirely
-different from those of looking at a motion picture.</p>
-
-<p>Two differences are especially notable. The first
-difference is that when we look at a painting we ourselves
-are practically the choosers of when and how
-long to look at any spot, line, shape, or color. In
-other words, we ourselves practically decide on how
-much and what kind of work our eyes shall do; but
-when we look at a motion picture we never know at
-any instant what we may be called upon to do the
-next instant. That makes us nervous. We need to
-be constantly braced for the shock and, if we are not
-so braced, we must suffer when the shock comes.</p>
-
-<p>The second difference is that everything in a painting
-is always actually at rest, while nearly everything
-in a motion picture is always in motion. If a painting,
-which does not move in any of its parts, can suggest
-movement to our imagination, or can make our
-eyes perform actual movements of vision, such movements,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">32</span>
-actual and imaginary, are pleasantly stimulating.
-The eyes enjoy the natural activity of their
-work, and we feel that there is life in the painting.
-But the motion picture, by its very nature, has as
-much life as it needs. It naturally gives the eyes all
-the work they can stand. Hence, if they need any
-stimulating change at all, it is rather the change from
-movement to repose.</p>
-
-<p>Now let us go to the movie theater. Very likely
-before the show is over we shall be treated to a rapid
-shifting from the blue of some exterior scene in the
-moonlight to the orange-yellowish glow of some interior
-scene in lamplight. Our eyes, therefore, must
-accommodate their lenses to one of these colors again
-and again, only to receive a sudden demand for accommodation
-to the other color. We have no choice
-in the matter except to get up and go out. Our eyes,
-already busy enough, do not need the stimulation of
-any more activity, and our minds, already active
-enough, would prefer the relief of something more
-reposeful.</p>
-
-<p>If the director must have this shifting from blue to
-orange to blue, etc., he might, at least, give us some
-warning, some softening of the shock, so to speak.
-For example, if there is to be a sudden shift from a
-yellowish lamp-light scene to a bluish night scene, a
-hint might be given by attracting our attention to a
-window, through which the blue of night is shown.
-And similarly in a bluish night scene our attention
-might be attracted toward the warm glow from a
-door or window as a warning that the next scene is
-to be flooded with that color. Thus in either case we
-would have a chance to prepare our eyes for the shift,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">33</span>
-and we would sense a better continuity of movement.</p>
-
-<p>The subject of color in the movies will be discussed
-again in following chapters. It may be remarked in
-passing that, since color movies are still highly experimental,
-it is only to be expected that mistakes of many
-kinds will be made. Doubtless the leading directors
-can be trusted to learn from experience. Yet it behooves
-us who sit in the theaters to be as disapproving
-of new faults as we are exultant over new beauties.</p>
-
-<p>It is not discouraging to discover a fault, so long
-as we see that it is one which might have been avoided.
-We want to make it plain in this chapter that, although
-the movies sometimes hurt the eyes, it is never due to
-any necessity. It is a fact that pictures on the screen,
-when properly made, are always pleasing to the spectators’
-eyes. And he who does not accept this as a
-fundamental proposition can hardly come by any large
-faith in the future of the photoplay as art.</p>
-
-<p>But we must make a few more eye tests for beauty.
-If you face a wall about twenty feet away, you can,
-without changing the position of your head, look at
-the left side or the right, at the top or bottom, or
-you can look at the four corners of the wall in succession.
-These three different kinds of movements,
-vertical, horizontal, circular, are controlled by as many
-different sets of muscles.</p>
-
-<p>When we look at pictures, especially large pictures,
-these muscles are constantly busy directing our line
-of regard from one point of interest to another; and,
-whether there are definite points of interest or not,
-our eyes will range over the lines and shapes as we
-try to discover what they are meant to represent.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">34</span></p>
-
-<p>Now a certain amount of eye-movement does not
-hurt the muscles; it is, on the contrary, rather pleasant,
-because their business is to attend to those matters.
-But the eye will become fatigued by a great
-amount of movement, especially when it is forced upon
-us at unexpected moments, just as any other part of
-the body will become fatigued when it is forced to
-perform a great number of sudden, unexpected tasks.</p>
-
-<p>A simple experiment will illustrate this further.
-Suppose that we are sitting in our door-yard, gazing
-across a valley at a group of trees a mile or so away.
-It is more restful to look at those distant trees than at
-a single tree only fifty feet away; and the reason is
-simple. When we look at any object our eyes have
-a tendency to follow its outline. Now, of course, it
-requires more rolling of the eyes to follow the outline
-of a tree near by than one in the distance. This
-rolling movement involves muscular work. And, if
-we look first at the near, large object and then shift
-to the distant, small ones, we immediately experience
-the restfulness of reduced work. There are other reasons
-why distant objects are restful to the eyes, but
-they do not concern us here.</p>
-
-<p>Have you ever noticed the pleasing effect in the
-motion pictures when the thing of interest, say, a train
-or a band of horsemen disappearing in the distance,
-narrows itself down to a small space? All images
-on the screen are, of course, equally distant from the
-spectator; yet there is a sense of restfulness, as we
-have just explained, because the rolling of the eyes
-decreases with the diminishing of the image and its
-area of movement on the screen.</p>
-
-<p>But suddenly there comes a close-up of a face<span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">35</span>
-twenty feet in diameter, and our eyes have to get busy
-in the effort to cover the whole field at once. They
-rove quickly over several square yards of screen until
-that face is completely surveyed and every detail
-noted. Lots of looking! Yes, but that “star” gets
-fifty thousand dollars a month! Can’t fool the camera
-though—crow’s-feet on both sides—fourteen diamonds
-in the left ear-drop <span class="locked">and——</span></p>
-
-<p>Flash to a broad, quiet, soft gray landscape, with
-a lone rider on the horizon—oh, pshaw!—diamonds
-must ’a’ been glass though—anyway, this picture’s
-good for sore eyes—kind o’ easy feelin’—Indian scout
-maybe—or <span class="locked">a——</span></p>
-
-<p>Flash to a close-up of a Mexican bandit, etc., etc.
-And our eyes get busy again mapping out the whole
-subject from hat to hoof, from bridle to tail. Exciting!
-Oh, yes, indeed, and interesting too, but not as
-art; for those little muscles up there are jerked around
-too much, they are working overtime, and soon get
-weary.</p>
-
-<p>“Oh, well, I reckon I can stand the strain,” says
-some heckler, who “don’t quite, you know, get this
-high-brow stuff.” Of course, he can stand it. We
-have stood the mad orchestra of the elevated trains,
-and the riveters, and the neighbor’s parrot for years,
-but we do not call it music.</p>
-
-<p>The difference between noise and harmony is a
-physical difference. If this were not true, no one could
-ever tune your piano. Jarring, clashing, discordant
-sounds displease the ear. Just why noise displeases
-is not for us to say. But we have already explained
-three reasons why bad motion pictures hurt the eyes.
-Let us remember them. First, sudden shifts from<span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">36</span>
-dark to bright pictures shock the eye. Second, sudden
-shifts from a picture in a “cool” tint to another
-in a “warm” tint, and vice versa, over-work the
-eye. Third, a series of quick close-ups or other pictures
-in which the frame is filled with the subject demands
-too much eye-movement.</p>
-
-<p>In the case of the close-up, or any large picture
-where the points of interest are scattered all over the
-field of vision, the eyes, as we have said, become
-strained by too much rolling, a muscular effort which
-is necessary even though the separate points of interest
-may themselves be fixed, as fixed as the four corners
-of the screen itself.</p>
-
-<p>But when the points of interest are moving things,
-as they generally are in the movies, new causes of
-strain often arise. Sometimes the object we are trying
-to look at moves so fast that we can hardly follow
-it. Quick movement is generally desired by the directors
-because they think that briskness, or “pep,”
-makes the dramatic action more intense. Consequently
-people in the movies walk, march, dance, fight, and
-carry on with terrific speed until our eyes become
-tired in the attempt to observe all that is happening.
-The cure for such pictorial hysterics is simple moderation,
-the elimination of jerky movements wherever
-possible, and the choice of movements so easy to follow
-that the eye may perceive them with the least
-muscular effort.</p>
-
-<p>We do not say that you who worship speed shall
-not have your express trains, your racing cars, your
-airplanes, your cow-ponies, and your Arabian steeds.
-You may have them all, because they can be so photographed
-that an actual run of two or three miles may<span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">37</span>
-be presented on the screen as a movement of only
-two or three feet.</p>
-
-<p>We find, too, that there is something pleasing about
-the apparent slowness of actions that are moderated
-by distance. On the far horizon, therefore, the fleetest
-things seem retarded to a stately pace that claims our
-restful gaze. But when a quick movement takes place
-in the foreground of the picture, too near the camera,
-ugliness results, because the demands on the eye-muscles
-are too severe and unexpected. Thus a sudden
-gesture, or the waving branches of trees or bushes,
-or a motor car driving up in front of a house, or
-even such intended grace as the movement in dancing,
-may spoil a picture by being too near the camera.</p>
-
-<p>Another thing which makes close-up movements
-ugly is the flicker, which cannot be entirely eliminated.
-Our readers are doubtless generally aware that what
-we see on the screen is simply the blending of a rapid
-succession of still pictures falling on different spots
-in an order and a direction which gives the appearance
-of motion. If you examine a film you will find
-that there are in fact sixteen little photographs, or
-“frames” to every foot of ribbon. The negative runs
-through the camera, and the positive film through the
-projecting machine, at a rate of about a foot per second.
-Now let us suppose that we have a screen sixteen
-feet long and that we throw upon it a picture of
-a car running at the rate of ten or eleven miles per
-hour. If the picture is a close view the image will
-move across our screen in just one second of time,
-for the speed we have assumed is at the rate of sixteen
-feet per second. But, since there are only sixteen
-frames in that foot, or second, of film, we know<span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">38</span>
-that only sixteen flashes of the car have been thrown
-on the screen during that second. Therefore, whatever
-particular part of the car we are looking at has
-fallen on sixteen different spots of the screen, and
-each spot is just one foot to the side of the previous
-one, because the screen is by assumption just sixteen
-feet wide. Now these separations are so wide that
-the eye cannot help noticing them even in the fraction
-of a second; there is not sufficient blending of images
-to form smooth motion; and the so-called flicker
-results.</p>
-
-<p>However, if the car is photographed going obliquely
-away from us, the entire motion may occupy only a
-small area of the screen, no matter how far or fast
-the car goes; consequently the images fall much closer
-together and the flicker becomes so slight that we
-scarcely notice it. Also, since the field of movement
-is smaller in extent, the rolling of our eyes in ranging
-over the subject is less, and the fatigue of the
-muscles is so slight that we scarcely notice that either.</p>
-
-<p>We have been arguing that large violent movements
-on the screen hurt the eyes, and we hope that our
-readers agree with us. But if any one is doubtful we
-invite him to make the following test. Go to any
-movie theater and sit down in the seventh or eighth
-row. Then after having seen about half of the picture,
-move back to the last row, or stand behind the
-last row. The picture will immediately seem more
-restful to the eyes, because the distance has made the
-screen seem smaller and the motions slower, two
-changes which, of course, make less work for the eyes.
-Now stay in the new position until the program is
-finished, and then see that part of the picture which<span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">39</span>
-was at first seen from the front seat. It will appear
-much more pleasing to the eye than it did the first
-time.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_039a" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 21em;">
- <img src="images/i_039a.jpg" width="1323" height="1661" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><i>Daylight and Lamplight</i>, a painting by William McGregor.
-The design illustrates artistic balance and
-rhythm. See <a href="#Page_41">pages 41</a> and <a href="#Page_77">77</a>.</div></div>
-
-<div id="if_i_039b" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 18em;">
- <img src="images/i_039b.png" width="1125" height="1381" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">A study of lines to illustrate the value of
-repetition within a pattern. See <a href="#Page_40">page 40</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>But we cannot all sit in the back row of a theater,
-and besides, even when screen motions are reasonably
-slow and limited, they may still fail to produce the
-effect of beauty.</p>
-
-<p>Now, before we go further into this discussion of
-beauty on the screen, let us recall, that, as we have
-already said, the process of vision is partly eye-work
-and partly brain-work. These two factors are so
-closely connected in fact, that scientists cannot definitely
-separate them.<a id="FNanchor_2" href="#Footnote_2" class="fnanchor">B</a></p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-
-<p><a id="Footnote_2" href="#FNanchor_2" class="fnanchor">B</a> If any of our readers are especially interested in the details of
-physiological and psychological experiments in vision which are
-made by experts, they should read Chapter III in Hugo Muensterberg’s
-“The Photoplay,” and should consult the current numbers
-and the volumes for the last five or six years of the “Psychological
-Review,” the “American Journal of Psychology,” the
-“Journal of Experimental Psychology,” and other similar periodicals,
-which are available in any large library.</p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>From the results published in scientific periodicals
-it may be learned that visible ugliness does not always
-make the physical work of the eye more difficult. This
-is not to contradict what we have already said in this
-chapter, but merely to state that there may be certain
-kinds of ugliness on the screen which apparently do
-not hurt the eye at all. And yet ugliness does affect
-the mental phase of vision. It will be worth while
-giving a page or more to the testing of this statement;
-and the discussion may lead to a useful definition to
-keep in mind when criticizing the movies.</p>
-
-<p>Curiously enough, the muscular movement of the
-eye when ranging over a single jagged, irregular line
-is practically the same as when ranging over a graceful<span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">40</span>
-line of similar length and direction. Scientific experiment
-shows that we move our eye-balls in a jerky,
-irregular manner, even when we view the most graceful
-line that can be drawn. Yet it is commonly said by
-all of us that one line delights the eye and the other
-does not. Evidently, therefore, the difference must
-lie in that function of seeing which the brain performs.
-But the brain, too, is a physical organ. It, too, can
-become fatigued, and it finds certain kinds of work
-less fatiguing than others.</p>
-
-<p>Psychologists have suggested that a graceful line
-is pleasant to look at because the regularity and
-smoothness of its changes in direction make it easily
-perceived as a complete unity. Thus in the diagram
-facing <a href="#Page_39">page 39</a>, lines A and B are pleasanter to look
-at than lines C and D, because their character as lines
-can be grasped by the mind more quickly and more
-easily than the character of C or D. And, for the
-same reason, lines A and B taken together make a more
-pleasing combination than lines B and C or lines C
-and D.</p>
-
-<p>Now, if you will shut the book and try to draw any
-one of these four lines, even in your imagination, you
-will discover that you remember A and B almost perfectly,
-while you can hardly remember a single part
-of either C or D. This proves that in your own case
-the business of seeing has been more successful with
-graceful lines than with ugly ones. And, of course,
-successful effort is always more pleasing than failure.</p>
-
-<p>Our working definition of good pictorial composition,
-offered in the preceding chapter, may be adapted
-here. Let us put it this way: A beautiful line or
-combination of lines is one in which we can see and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">41</span>
-feel much with ease, while an ugly line or combination
-is one in which we cannot see or feel much except
-with great difficulty. The terms “ease” and “difficulty”
-apply both to eye-work and brain-work.</p>
-
-<p>One reason why we see <em>much with ease</em> in a beautiful
-line is evidently that any one part of the whole is
-a kind of key to some adjoining or corresponding
-part. Thus in line A the lower curve is very similar
-to the upper curve and leads into it with the smoothest
-continuity. And this same lower curve of A is so
-similar to the lower curve of B that we can see instantly
-the balanced relation between them. In ugly
-lines, on the other hand, there are no such visual helps.
-Yet, if some kind of balance or repetition is adopted,
-it may be that lines which are ugly when considered
-singly take on a kind of beauty or interestingness when
-considered as a group. Thus lines E, F, and G, are
-not as pleasing when standing alone as they become
-when considered in relation to a similar line symmetrically
-placed. Therefore, the combinations EF or
-FG, or even EFG are more pleasing than any one of
-their parts.</p>
-
-<p>Now let us apply these principles of continuity and
-repetition to the lines in a picture. If you turn to
-Paxton’s “Daylight and Lamplight,” facing <a href="#Page_39">page 39</a>,
-you will observe instantly the beautifully curving line
-of the woman’s back and also a balancing line down
-the side of the urn. That sweep of line gives at once
-the key to the arrangement of the picture.<a id="FNanchor_3" href="#Footnote_3" class="fnanchor">C</a> In other
-words, you can see much of that picture with ease,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">42</span>
-even in a glance. Now if you examine this picture
-more in detail you will find much continuity of line
-and many parallelisms of line and shape, all of which
-tend to make the arrangement simple, without reducing
-any of the actual contents of the picture.</p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-
-<p><a id="Footnote_3" href="#FNanchor_3" class="fnanchor">C</a> Out of fairness to the painter it must be added that this
-canvas, as the title indicates, is also a study in the balancing of
-cool and warm colors.</p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>The “much” which we can see in a beautiful line includes
-such things as its meaning or use in the picture,
-its fitness for that use, its power to suggest associations,
-its interestingness, etc. But we shall not take
-up those phases of beauty in this chapter; we are now
-merely arguing that pictorial beauty economizes the
-work of the eye and brain, while visible ugliness does
-not.</p>
-
-<p>What we said, a moment ago, regarding the value
-of continuity and repetition in fixed lines may also be
-applied to moving lines and objects. The great appeal
-of the screen lies in the showing of vivid movement,
-the flow of forms, the subtle weaving, through soft
-play of light and shadow, of fanciful figures that melt
-like music while we gaze, and yet remain in our minds
-like curves of a strange melody. When such glimpses
-of beauty come, our eyes and brains surely do not feel
-any friction or strain in the process of looking. But
-when ugly motions are presented the eye must perform
-excessive movement, and the brain must exert excessive
-effort.</p>
-
-<p>What is an ugly motion? To answer this we must
-observe one or two facts concerning the visual process
-of seeing motions. We must admit the fact that one
-can perceive the motion of an object without following
-it with the eyes. Any one can test this for himself
-by fixing his eyes steadily on some spot on the wall.
-Without shifting his glance he may have knowledge<span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">43</span>
-of motions going on at other places many feet away
-from that spot. But it is also a fact that he will
-immediately feel an inclination to shift his eyes in
-order to see any one of these motions more clearly.
-In making that shift he will, of course, have to move
-his eyeballs. Now, if that moving object changes its
-place, his eyeballs will continue to make the movements
-necessary to follow it. And, if the attention continues
-directed toward that object, his eyes will have
-to make great or small movements, according as the
-object makes a great or small change of place.</p>
-
-<p>An interesting theory, which scientific tests support,
-is that, although the eye has to make a series of
-irregular, jerky movements when following any moving
-object, these movements become fewer and smaller
-as the smoothness and regularity of the observed
-motion increases.</p>
-
-<p>What we have just said about eye movement explains,
-at least partly, why the aimless crawling of a
-house fly over a window pane is ugly, while the graceful
-flying of a sea gull is beautiful; why the clambering
-of a monkey is ugly, while the swimming of a fish
-is graceful, and why the zigzag falling of a sheet of
-paper thrown from a window is displeasing, while the
-smooth spiralling of an airplane is pleasing.</p>
-
-<p>In some of the movements which we classify as
-beautiful, it is clear that the principle of repetition
-is at work, which, as we have said, makes seeing
-easy. Any task accomplished once and undertaken
-again becomes easier and easier with repetition. We
-have already shown how this makes the perception of
-rhythmical fixed lines or balanced composition of
-fixed lines easier for the mind, if not for the eye itself.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_44">44</span>
-A similar experience of ease comes from viewing
-rhythmical or balanced motions.</p>
-
-<p>You would not enjoy watching a dancer whose
-every movement was entirely unlike every previous
-movement. The effect would be utter confusion.
-You could not grasp, could not remember, what you
-saw. And you would probably say that it was not
-dancing at all. On the contrary, the beauty of a dance
-is largely due to the frequent repetitions or similarities
-of movements. Again and again you see and
-enjoy the same flexing of knee and poising of foot,
-the same curving of back and tossing of head, the
-same sweeping of hand and floating of drapery; and
-again and again the dancer moves through the same
-path of circling lines. Yet in these repetitions there
-are slight variations, too, because no human being
-works with the precision of a machine. And as you
-watch the dance you get variety without multiplicity;
-you see much with ease.</p>
-
-<p>“Now, look here,” cuts in some old-time producer,
-“you don’t mean to say that you want our actors to
-dance through a drama, do you—a murder scene, or
-a wedding, or a meeting of profiteers to raise the
-price of soap?” No, indeed, we do not. In fact, we
-are hardly thinking of them as actors at all—not in
-this chapter. We are merely thinking of them as
-moving shapes upon a screen. And we want those
-shapes to move about in such a way that the motions
-will not hurt our eyes.</p>
-
-<p>If we study those films that please us most we shall
-discover easy continuity of movement, so that a path
-of motion described in any one scene is extended, as it
-were, into a similar path of motion in the following
-scene. In such motion pictures there may be shifts, but<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">45</span>
-there are no breaks. Paths of motion on the screen
-can remain long in our memories, as though they
-were fixed lines in a picture. Clearly, therefore, it
-would not be pleasing to have these remembered lines
-of motion clashing with those which are being perceived.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_045" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 32em;">
- <img src="images/i_045.jpg" width="2008" height="1650" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>Audrey</i>. Cover up the left half of this picture and the lower half of the
-remaining part, and the quarter which then remains will contain a more pleasing
-and dramatic composition than that of the view taken as a whole. See <a href="#Page_53">pages 53</a>
-and <a href="#Page_71">71</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>So much for the optical effects of single motions
-coming in succession. Now we must advance to the
-consideration of several motions going on in various
-directions during the same moment, which is a more
-usual situation in the photoplay. Several motions at
-once may constitute a harmony or a jumble, according
-to the first demands which they make upon the
-eye-work and brain-work of vision.</p>
-
-<p>The difference between visual harmony and disharmony
-seems to depend partly on the fact that a
-pair of human eyes work together as one, and not
-as two separate instruments. You cannot look up
-with one eye and down with the other; you cannot
-look to the left with one eye and to the right with
-the other; you cannot look at a distant object with
-one eye and at a near one with the other. Hence, if
-you try to look intently at two or more objects crossing
-each other in opposite directions, your eyes are
-baffled and the effect is not pleasurable. There is
-also a conflict in our mental work of seeing, when
-opposing motions try to claim equal attention at the
-same time, unless, as we have previously stated, these
-motions are in some kind of rhythmical balance with
-each other.</p>
-
-<p>Because of this baffling of eye and brain, therefore,
-we are displeased by the sight of two automobiles<span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">46</span>
-passing each other in opposite directions, or by the
-crossing of an actor’s gestures with the spoke of a
-wheel or the twig of a tree. A particularly ugly
-crossing is that of false and real motion, which even
-some of the best directors still indulge in. False, or
-apparent, motion occurs when the camera itself has
-been moving about while the picture was being taken.
-Thus a road is made to shoot upwards over the screen
-while our hero is riding madly toward us, or a parlor
-slides drunkenly to one side while some fair lady
-marches toward a door, or a stairway becomes a waterfall
-which she swims upstairs. The real motion, of
-course, contains the dramatic interest, but the false
-motion forces itself upon us by its novelty or unexpectedness;
-it becomes difficult for us to see much
-with ease, and the result is ugliness.</p>
-
-<p>A particularly annoying device of recent vogue is
-the sub-title insert which is decorated with symbolical
-motions. It forces the spectator to read words and
-look at motions at the same time and upon the same
-spot of the screen. The Metro interpretation of the
-“Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse,” beautiful in its
-photographed scenes, was spoiled by much ugliness
-of that kind. In one sub-title we must look at the
-Beast snorting and chopping his long jaws, while
-several lines of type are spread over his horrible
-movements. In others we see water flowing from
-the bottom of the screen toward the top, or we see
-a pin-wheel of sparks, to represent telegraphic messages
-going around the world, or we see a squirrel
-in his wheel-cage, to represent something or other,
-and in each of these cases we must also read words
-in glaring type blazed on top of the moving symbols.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">47</span></p>
-
-<p>Oppositions and conflicts baffle and bewilder the
-eye and mind, but concurrent co-operating motions
-please them. It is easy, for example, to look at the
-shower of fire from a sky rocket, because the lines
-move in similar directions and remain comparatively
-near together, each one, as it were, helping the others,
-so that what we see in one part of the motion is a key
-to the rest of the motion. There is a similar unity
-and rhythmical balance in the motion of a flock of
-birds, a school of fish, or a group of dancers, the
-billows of the sea, or the feathery fall of snowflakes.</p>
-
-<p>The production of harmonious motions in a photoplay
-might seem to us spectators to be merely a matter
-of spying with a camera and catching views of
-harmonious actions and settings. But the problem is
-not so simple. For the movements within any given
-scene may be perfectly orchestrated with respect to
-each other, and yet may clash with every one of the
-movements in the following scene. If in one picture
-our eyes and minds have adjusted themselves to the
-delicate threading of snow-flakes, falling like a softly
-changing tapestry, they can only be shocked by a sudden
-jump to the vigorous curling of a sea wave breaking
-on the beach. And in our natural desire to appreciate
-both subjects at once we are disappointed to find
-that each has spoiled the other. Delicacy looks at
-power and thinks it violence; power looks at delicacy
-and thinks it weakness. It is a visual effect such as
-one would get from a drawing where the hair lines of
-the finest pen and thinnest ink were crossed by the
-coarse marks of a blunt piece of charcoal.</p>
-
-<p>So sharp a contrast might have a certain dramatic,
-stirring effect, like the use of swear words in a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">48</span>
-prayer; the very hurt might bring a certain thrill.
-An original and ingenious man, Mr. Griffith, for instance,
-may choose to show us a close-up of a little
-girl smiling in wistful innocence, her pretty curls
-quivering in the light breeze, contrasted suddenly with
-a reeking flood of soldiers pouring into a city street.
-Striking? Yes, exactly. The device is so striking
-that Mr. Griffith himself has learned to use it with
-restraint. Because once upon a time he composed
-a photoplay called “Intolerance,” which was so full
-of striking contrasts that it failed. There were only
-a few thousand people in the world who could stand
-the strain of looking at it.</p>
-
-<p>Thus as we analyze the optical aspects of a motion
-picture we are amazed at the number of things that
-may conspire to hurt our eyes, and we sympathize
-more than ever with the sincere cinema composer.
-He, the new hope of the movies, feels the need of
-other equipment than a line of talk and a megaphone.
-He no longer applies for a position in a studio on
-the strength of his record as an actor, as a stage director,
-as a city editor, as a college cheer leader, or as
-a drill sergeant in the army. He has begun to think
-in pictorial composition and not in words. He is
-never without his sketching pad and piece of charcoal,
-because, forsooth, his business is picture making. He
-makes hundreds of sketches by day, of shapes, and
-lines, and tones, and he goes over them again and
-changes them by night. His scenario contains almost
-as many drawings as words. He knows before he
-says “Good morning” to his queens and cut-throats
-just what places and spaces their figures will occupy
-during the pictorial climaxes, as well as during the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">49</span>
-movements to, and away from, those climaxes. He
-sits among miles of films which he cuts, joins, runs
-through his projecting machine, and cuts and joins
-again. He knows that pictorial beauty does not come
-to the screen merely because the camera itself is a
-wonderful instrument. He knows, what so many
-critics are beginning to discover, that “the photography”
-may be excellent in a film, while its pictorial
-composition is atrocious. He knows first and last and
-always that, unless he makes his photoplay fundamentally
-pleasing to the eyes of the spectator, he can
-never give it the magic power of graphic art.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_50" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">50</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">PICTORIAL FORCE IN FIXED PATTERNS</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">Frequently</span> while a director is rehearsing a photoplay
-scene he will sing out the command, “Hold it!”
-indicating thereby that the player has struck an attitude,
-or the players have woven themselves into a
-pattern, which is so expressive and beautiful that it
-deserves to be held for several seconds. What the
-camera then records will be shown on the screen as
-a striking pictorial moment, and, while it lasts, will
-appear as fixed as a painting.</p>
-
-<p>But it is a peculiar psychological fact that such pictorial
-moments seem to occur in every movement,
-whether the actors have paused or not, the spectator
-seeing and remembering these arrested moments as
-though they were fixed pictures. This peculiar fact,
-that we remember fixed moments among continuous
-movements, has been discussed at some length in
-Chapter III of “The Art of Photoplay Making,” and
-will, therefore, not be dwelt upon here. However,
-a single example may illustrate what we mean. Suppose
-we watch a diver stepping out upon a high springboard
-and diving into a pool. The whole feat is, of
-course, a movement without pause from beginning
-to end; yet our eyes will somehow arrest one moment
-as the most interesting, the most pictorial. It may
-be the moment when the diver is about midway between<span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">51</span>
-the springboard and the water, a moment when
-the body seems to float strangely upon the air. We
-are not unaware of the other phases of the dive, yet
-this particular moment impresses us; to it we apply
-our fine appraisal of form.</p>
-
-<p>Similarly in a motion picture theater we unconsciously
-select moments from the action before us.
-These fleeting moments which fix themselves, so to
-speak, demand practically the same work (or shall we
-call it play?) from our eyes and minds as the momentarily
-fixed pictures which the director sometimes demands.
-At such times the whole pattern on the screen
-becomes as static as a painting, and its power or weakness,
-its beauty or lack of beauty, may be appreciated
-much as one would appreciate a design in a painting.</p>
-
-<p>A painting enchants the beholder, not only by its
-color, but also by its lines and pattern. The peculiar
-power which resides in the arrangement of lines and
-masses has been studied by art critics for hundreds
-of years, and many of the principles which they have
-discovered might well be recalled by us in judging
-those moments of a motion picture which may be
-viewed as fixed designs. And what we learn by making
-such applications will help us greatly toward a
-better understanding of the beauty of pictorial
-motions on the screen.</p>
-
-<p>By what visual processes do we grasp the meaning
-of a picture? What happens when we first look at
-the picture? And what happens as we continue looking?
-The answers, as nearly as can be ascertained,
-are as follows. When we face a picture our eyes
-first glance at some spot or region which is more
-attractive than all others, and then proceed to explore<span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">52</span>
-the whole picture, ranging over all of its parts, and
-returning again to the center of attraction. In certain
-compositions this whole tour of inspection may
-be accomplished in one trip, and may be repeated
-at will, while in other compositions the inspection may
-require various side trips away from the center of
-interest to the outlying districts and back again. Of
-course, we are not aware that our eyes are doing all
-these things when we are at the movies, but that is
-what happens, just the same.</p>
-
-<p>These visual processes take place in an exceedingly
-short time, usually only a fraction of a second, but
-they are real physical processes, nevertheless, subject
-to the laws of physical comfort and fatigue, and capable
-of being tested by the ordinary laws of physical
-efficiency.</p>
-
-<p>Perhaps the first test, in this hectic age of ours,
-is speed. The quicker we can see and interpret a
-thing after we begin looking at it, the more satisfied
-we are. Another test is ease, or freedom from
-fatigue. The less energy we expend in looking, the
-more pleased we are. Hence, if the several parts of
-a picture can be quickly and easily seen and related
-to each other, the picture as a whole may be considered
-beautiful, providing it satisfies certain other
-demands, which will be analyzed later on.</p>
-
-<p>Now suppose that we are at the movies and that
-some pictorial moment from the flowing action is
-arrested in our minds. If we are critical and feel like
-analyzing the effect of that arrested moment we may
-well ask such questions as the following:</p>
-
-<p>What portion of that picture did we look at first,
-and why? Was that the spot which the cinema composer<span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">53</span>
-desired us to see first? If not, how did he
-happen to mislead us and waste our time?</p>
-
-<p>Where did our glances wander as we continued
-looking at the picture? Did they follow the lines
-which the cinema composer had mapped out? If not,
-what is wrong with his plan?</p>
-
-<p>What part of the picture remains longest in memory?
-Does it coincide with the dramatic emphasis
-intended by the composer? If not, what caused the
-wrong accent?</p>
-
-<p>Was the picture as a whole really beautiful to the
-eyes? If not, what made it displeasing?</p>
-
-<p>Beginning with the first question, we may say that
-the attracting power of any portion of a picture depends
-upon many circumstances and conditions. For
-example, a patch of white on an area of dark will
-attract the eye, because it is natural for the eye to
-seek light in preference to dark. Hence, in the “still”
-from “Audrey” on <a href="#Page_45">page 45</a> we see the woman first;
-then we see the tree trunks, the reflections in the
-water, and the person half hidden in the bushes to
-the left. It is also natural for the eye to catch and
-follow the longest line in a composition. Therefore
-the trunk of the fallen tree in this picture helps to
-lead the eye to the woman. It is, furthermore, natural
-for the eye to follow two or more lines to a point
-where they meet. Therefore this picture would have
-given more emphasis to the woman if she had been
-placed near the root of the tree trunk, where many
-lines converge.</p>
-
-<p>The spectator in the theater should be enabled to
-see the central interest at the very first instant of
-projection. Hence when the picture is being taken,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">54</span>
-all lines of indication, gesture, draperies, etc., should
-be set, before the camera begins “shooting,” and these
-lines should connect up with the paths of previously
-moving objects, so that the spectator’s eyes may sweep
-at once to the central interest.</p>
-
-<p>The need of this may be illustrated by a horrible
-example. Let us turn to the “still” on <a href="#Page_55">page 55</a>. It
-is a safe bet that every one who looks at this picture
-will first see a long diagonal pole, one of the supports
-of the swing, because that is the longest, most
-striking line of the picture. The poles leaning together
-and the converging chains, though of no dramatic
-importance whatsoever, attract immediate attention
-to themselves, and also carry the eye to the two
-standing girls; which is clearly a mistake in composition,
-for the real interest evidently lies in the facial
-expressions of the man and woman, who are conversing
-with each other.</p>
-
-<p>Students of pictorial design have discovered that,
-of all converging lines in a drawing, those which
-meet at right angles usually attract the eyes most
-strongly. Now if we look again at the “still” under
-discussion we will observe that there are many square
-corners in its composition, but that none of these
-angles coincide with any interest deserving of pictorial
-emphasis. Two of the strongest accents are at
-the square corners where the long pole and the brick
-curbing meet. Yet there is certainly no very exciting
-interest in that region. Hence our eyes wander thither
-in vain.</p>
-
-<p>Let us speculate for a moment on what would
-happen to this composition if we remove the diagonal
-poles, chains, etc., and turn the swing into a seat.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">55</span>
-The figures, even as they stand, would then form a
-not unpleasing rhythm, and the line of heads, with
-expressions helping to give direction, would lead to
-the heroine.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_055a" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 24em;">
- <img src="images/i_055a.jpg" width="1534" height="1254" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">This “still” illustrates misplaced emphasis and several other
-defects in pictorial composition which characterized the general
-run of movies a few years ago. See <a href="#Page_54">page 54</a>.</div></div>
-
-<div id="if_i_055b" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 24em;">
- <img src="images/i_055b.jpg" width="1532" height="1338" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">A specimen of bad composition, from an old film. The window
-is emphasized by its curious shape, by its central position,
-by its strong contrasts of black and white, and by the woman’s
-gesture; yet this window has no dramatic significance whatsoever
-in the scene. See <a href="#Page_55">page 55</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>A glaring example of wrong emphasis caused by
-the attraction of a right-angled shape is to be seen in
-a “still” from “Other Men’s Wives,” on opposite page,
-where the window, toward which the woman unconsciously
-points her wand, irresistibly attracts the attention
-of the spectator. Is it not evident from even a
-cursory analysis of these “stills” that, though the
-directors may have given some thought to the poses
-and groupings of the performers, they have failed to
-realize that every other visible thing within scope of
-the camera must also be harmonized with the figures
-in order to keep the dramatic emphasis where it
-belongs?</p>
-
-<p>Keeping in mind what we have just said about the
-visual accents of right angles we turn to a “still”
-from the “Spell of the Yukon,” facing <a href="#Page_28">page 28</a>. The
-window catches our eyes before anything else in the
-picture, both because of its square corners and because
-of its sharp contrasts of black and white.
-Though this distraction may be only for a brief moment,
-it is enough to keep our attention for that
-moment away from the man and boy, set in fine
-atmosphere.</p>
-
-<p>It is only common sense to aim at making the visual
-interest of a picture coincide with the dramatic interest.
-And this can be done by controlling such means
-of attraction as we have just mentioned. When we
-look at the painting entitled “The Shepherdess,” facing
-<a href="#Page_21">page 21</a>, our glance falls immediately upon the shepherdess,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">56</span>
-because the almost vertical line of her body
-forms a cross with the horizontal line of the sheep’s
-backs. Yet the design is so subtle that, unless we
-stop to analyze, we do not notice how the painter
-achieves his emphasis. We do not notice that the
-front of the woman’s body is really a continuation
-of the left edge of a tree which extends to the top
-of the frame, that her profile is the continuation of
-a line of foliage from another tree, that her staff
-makes right angles with her throat and with the back
-of her head, that the rhythmical contours of a sheep
-flow into her left hand and arm, and that a shadow
-from the lower center of the picture leads to her
-feet.</p>
-
-<p>If a painter establishes his emphasis so carefully in
-a picture which the beholder may regard for hours
-at a time, it would seem all the more urgent for a
-cinema composer to study out the correct emphasis for
-a pictorial moment which the spectator must grasp
-in only a second or two. It is extremely important,
-for the simple reason that, if the director does not
-deliberately draw the attention of the spectator to the
-dramatic interest in the picture, it is most likely that
-accident will emphasize some other part, as we have
-seen in the examples already discussed; and then,
-before the spectator has time to reason himself away
-from the false emphasis to the true interest, the action
-will go on to some other scene, and a part of the real
-message will be lost.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_057" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 34em;">
- <img src="images/i_057.jpg" width="2146" height="1664" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>The Spell of the Yukon</i>. There are too many distracting shapes in the left
-end of this picture. Mask over the cabin, the sleigh, and the two dogs farthest to the
-left, and the remaining part of the picture becomes a pleasing composition of line, shape,
-and tone. See <a href="#Page_56">page 56</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>Let us illustrate this again by turning to another
-“still” from “The Spell of the Yukon,” facing <a href="#Page_57">page
-57</a>. The thing which attracts first and longest is
-the strange object in the upper left-hand corner. On<span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">57</span>
-the screen our eyes would wander away to the dogs
-and the man, but they would wander back again to
-that strange shape, because it is a law of visual attention
-that the strangest and most unfamiliar shape
-attracts most strongly. We would be curious about
-that shape, and by the time we had decided that it
-was an Alaskan sled, the picture would fade out and
-we would have missed the message, namely the affectionate
-companionship of the man and his dogs.</p>
-
-<p>If the sled had been more completely shown, or
-viewed from a different angle, or placed in a more
-natural position immediately behind a team of dogs,
-it would not have seemed strange and distracting.
-This composition could be greatly improved by simply
-eliminating the left third of it. If you cover up the
-sled and the two dogs nearest it with a sheet of paper
-you will see that what remains is a fairly pleasing
-arrangement, with considerably more emphasis on the
-man and the theme of his affection for the dogs, with
-a better pattern and more rhythmical lines.</p>
-
-<p>If the director had simplified his composition as we
-have suggested he might have eliminated the wrong
-emphasis and secured the right emphasis in one
-stroke. The dark figure of the man framed roughly
-in white and gray would have attracted attention by
-its tonal isolation. Emphasis by isolation involves
-simplicity and economy, and for that very reason,
-perhaps, this device is so often neglected by less experienced
-directors. They breathe the poisonous air of
-extravagance and thrash their arms in the heretical
-belief that multiplicity is power. Compare, for instance,
-the “still” of “Polly of the Circus,” facing
-<a href="#Page_79">page 79</a>, with “The Banquet of the Officers of St.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">58</span>
-Andrew,” by Frans Hals, facing <a href="#Page_79">page 79</a>, and you
-get at once the distinct impression that Hals’s picture
-depicts a larger crowd than the “still.” But you will
-be astonished to find that the painting actually contains
-but twelve men, while the “still” contains seventeen
-men, one woman, and one horse.</p>
-
-<p>In the painting every head is isolated by hat, ruff,
-costume, or panel, and seems to have plenty of room
-to move freely without bumping. Our eyes can study
-the contours and values of those heads without colliding
-with other interests. And the fact that each
-head is treated almost as though it were a separate
-portrait might be called a trick of design which makes
-us overestimate the number in the group, thus getting
-the impression of a throng. Surely this is good
-economy. Compare it with the extravagant composition
-of the circus crowd. There you see heads and
-bodies huddled together in a meaningless jumble. No
-interest is significantly framed, no two interests are
-properly spaced. The director may have swelled the
-wage roll, but he has shrivelled the art product. Perhaps
-it is not necessary to go further in support of our
-contention that certain visual values and devices of arrangement
-can be used, separately or in combination,
-to control the glances of spectators, and that, unless
-these means are properly used, pictorial impressiveness
-cannot be obtained. We have discussed the uses of a
-bright patch on a generally dark ground, long converging
-lines, crosses, sharp contrasts of tone and color,
-unfamiliar shapes, and isolation of subject. Scores of
-other principles of design, well known to painters,
-might be used to emphasize a screen picture during that
-moment of the action when all movement seems to have<span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">59</span>
-stopped. Of course, when the movement is actually
-or apparently resumed, emphasis will be controlled according
-to the laws by which motion appeals to the
-eye. But that is a subject for another chapter.</p>
-
-<p>To continue our analysis of fixed design, let us examine
-the methods whereby various pictorial elements
-may be fused into a unity. Every writer knows that
-a sentence is really a train of words which, though
-actually standing still on the paper, can carry the reader’s
-mind swiftly across the page. By various literary
-devices the reader’s interest is caught and carried from
-emphasis to emphasis, and by various devices the
-reader’s thoughts may be organized into a complete
-unity. So, too, the lines and shapes of a picture, however
-still they may stand for the moment on the screen
-have the power to carry the spectator’s eyes from
-interest to interest; and they may, if properly
-designed, guide his attention through the picture in
-such a way as to gather all of its parts into a complete
-unity.</p>
-
-<p>When the eyes are caught by something in a picture,
-they do not at first rest there, but proceed, as we
-have said, on a tour of inspection of the whole area
-within the frame of that picture, after which they return
-again to the first visual interest. In making this
-tour the eyes seek, or at least, follow a pattern. Let
-us test these statements by turning to the “still” facing
-<a href="#Page_61">page 61</a>. You cannot see every point of the picture
-at once. Therefore your eyes range over it. Perhaps,
-now that we call your attention to it, you can feel your
-eyes moving as they follow the outlines of the white
-mass which is produced by the girl’s figure and dress.
-To make sure that you feel these movements, just look<span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">60</span>
-quickly from her head to her foot, to her right hand,
-to her head again, etc. Now you realize that the white
-mass is contained in a distinct triangle. That triangle
-is the pattern of the picture. Whether you like it or
-not makes no difference; the triangular path must be
-followed by your eyes.</p>
-
-<p>This little exercise shows that the eyes, unlike the
-lens of a camera, cannot see every part of a picture at
-once, but must range over it from point to point, repeating
-the tour again and again as long as the picture
-is in view. But, if we cannot see head, hand, and foot
-at once, it is evident that we must remember the head
-while we are observing the hand, that we must remember
-both the head and the hand while we are observing
-the foot, etc., else the whole picture could never be built
-up in our minds. It is also evident that the smoother
-the path, the more easily and quickly can the tour of
-inspection be made.</p>
-
-<p>The eye needs paths, finger-posts, and bridges to
-carry it from one part of a picture to another, a need
-which painters discovered ages ago, and responded to
-by uniting the lines of their drawings into some sort
-of image or design. Thus the old masters often constructed
-their paintings on the design of a circle, a rectangle,
-a triangle, a diamond, a right-angled cross, an
-X shape, an S curve, or some other equally simple pattern,
-finding by experience that this practice always
-helped the beholder to grasp the picture as a unity. But
-they were real magicians, those medieval masters, and
-as such knew how to conceal their designs. Their technique,
-which the probing critic lays bare, is neither seen
-nor suspected by the average beholder who stands
-worshipful before their paintings. In fact, the technique<span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">61</span>
-of graphic design can be effective only when it
-works subconsciously in the spectator’s mind. Furthermore,
-those old masters knew how to achieve many
-results through simple means. They knew how to produce
-unity, emphasis, balance, and rhythm by the skillful
-manipulation of even a single device.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_061" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 34em;">
- <img src="images/i_061.jpg" width="2162" height="1666" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><i>A Triangle.</i> The fundamental pattern in a picture should not be obtrusive, as in this
-too obviously triangular shape. Compare this “still” with the illustration facing <a href="#Page_76">page
-76</a>. See also <a href="#Page_59">pages 59</a>, <a href="#Page_72">72</a> and <a href="#Page_76">76</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>By contrast many motion picture directors of to-day
-are mere bunglers. For example, in the “still” portrait
-which we have just studied there is unity and a definite,
-though heavy, equilibrium, but there is no rhythm, and
-the emphasis is sadly misplaced. The pose of the woman
-and her relation to the rug and the background
-admittedly make a unity. Our eyes ranging over the
-triangle, can easily grasp all that is important in the
-picture and leave out the rest; but the triangular design
-is severe and makes a wrong emphasis. In the first
-place, the design is too obviously a triangle. We think
-of it as a mathematical figure, and thus waste part of
-the attention which should be directed upon the woman
-herself. And, in the second place, the accent is at the
-wrong corner and on the wrong side of the triangle.
-The base of the triangle is accented by containing the
-longest line in the composition, the line being further
-emphasized by its straightness and by the sharp contrast
-between black and white which it marks. This
-emphasis is, of course, wrong, for we are certainly not
-interested in the pattern of this rug. There is also no
-reason why our attention should be called to the woman’s
-foot, or to the adjacent corner of the white panel
-in the rug, yet our glance is attracted to that region
-by the strange zigzag line described by the slipper and
-that white corner. These accents are wrong at first
-glance, and they remain wrong as long as the picture<span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">62</span>
-lasts, because every time we repeat the tour of inspection
-our eyes rest a moment on these false interests.</p>
-
-<p>To show that these mistakes lie entirely in the treatment,
-and not in the device of the triangle, we need
-only turn to the painting of “Mme. Lebrun and Her
-Daughter,” facing <a href="#Page_76">page 76</a>. Here is a composition
-distinctly triangular in design, yet one may have admired
-this picture hundreds of times without observing
-that fact. Here is unity, without obviousness or
-severity. Our eyes leap to the apex of the triangle, and
-there find the chief interest, the head of the mother.
-And, as we continue gazing, our attention still favors
-the mother, because the white areas of her shoulder,
-arm, and robe attract the eye more strongly than the
-other portions of the picture. Here, too, is graceful
-balance and a flowing rhythm in every line.</p>
-
-<p>If we consider merely the dramatic action of the
-subjects, as the motion picture directors so often do,
-we observe that the poses in Mme. Lebrun’s painting
-are natural and easy, that the gesture is graceful and
-telling, and we realize how completely and impressively
-the technique of design, the craft of composition, expresses
-the message of the painter.</p>
-
-<p>A part of Mme. Lebrun’s technique consisted in
-eliminating the setting, because in this particular case
-she found it easier to express her meaning without
-describing environment. Setting may often well be
-eliminated in the movies, too, as in “Moon-Gold,” discussed
-below; but usually the physical environment of
-action, as has been stated rather exhaustively in Chapter
-VIII of “The Art of Photoplay Making,” can be
-dramatized more vividly in the movies than in any
-other narrative art. And it is an interesting problem<span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">63</span>
-of design to weave places into a definite unity with
-persons, things, and action.</p>
-
-<p>Let us see how this problem has been met in the
-cabin scene of “The Spell of the Yukon,” facing <a href="#Page_28">page
-28</a>, which, in spite of the too conspicuous window, already
-spoken of, has a rather successful pictorial arrangement.
-For the sake of experiment, this “still”
-may be analyzed by making a simple drawing, as in
-the sketch facing <a href="#Page_28">page 28</a>. We see that the design
-consists essentially of an oval shape surrounded by
-rectangles. The rectangles may be seen in the lines of
-the window, the bunk, the table, etc. The oval, which
-includes all of the dramatic action, may be traced from
-the boy’s head, down the boy’s arm to the man’s
-right knee and leg, up the man’s left hand, arm, and
-shoulder to his head, and thence across to the boy’s
-head again. In the center of this oval is the hand
-holding a pipe and making a telling gesture in the
-story.</p>
-
-<p>This oval design, taken by itself, is an excellent composition.
-The lines furnish easy paths for the eye, and
-bind the boy and man together into a dramatic unity.
-There is, to be sure, only an imaginary line between
-the faces of the man and the boy, but that imaginary
-line is nevertheless as vivid as any visible thing in the
-picture. In fact, the break in the visible part of the
-oval serves to arrest our attention upon the faces for
-a moment every time our glance swings through the
-oval pattern. Leading toward this oval are the straight
-lines of the bunk and the table, thus serving to give
-unity and force. But the lines of the window make
-an isolated pattern which, instead of leading one’s eye
-toward the dramatic focus, does just the opposite. The<span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">64</span>
-design, as a whole, therefore, is imperfect. And, though
-we see much in the picture, we do not see it entirely
-with ease.</p>
-
-<p>If we turn to “Derby Day,” facing this page, a drawing
-by the English artist, Thomas Rowlandson, we
-shall find a more interesting design and a surer control
-of accents. Here the basic theme is a long line.
-By “line” in this case we mean, not merely a single
-stroke of the pencil, but any succession of lines, shapes,
-or even spots, so arranged that they make a track for
-the eye to follow. In “Derby Day” the long swinging
-line of the road is the basis of the design. Yet this
-line is not quite identical with the wheel tracks. It begins,
-in fact, with the feet of the donkey at the lower
-right-hand corner of the frame, and follows through
-the dog, the baskets under the wagon, the hub of the
-wheel, then over the heads of the group, through the
-hubs of the third wagon, then with a slight downward
-drop it swings along the edge of the field and the hedge,
-and finally leads through the horses and wagons, out at
-the left end of the picture.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_064a" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 29em;">
- <img src="images/i_064a.jpg" width="1808" height="1151" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><i>Derby Day</i>, a drawing by Thomas Rowlandson, showing the kind of
-composition which could be effectively used in photoplays. See <a href="#Page_64">page 64</a>.</div></div>
-
-<div id="if_i_064b" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 29em;">
- <img src="images/i_064b.png" width="1808" height="1174" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">Analysis of the fundamental design in <i>Derby Day</i> (above). See
-<a href="#Page_64">page 64</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>Upon this line the whole design is built, and rather
-cleverly, too, for our attention is controlled by the
-subtle ordination of accents. At the right end of the
-line is the most unusual and striking shape in the picture,
-namely, the curved figure described by the wagon-cover
-and the wheel. Such a strange shape, as we have
-pointed out earlier in this chapter, has a strong attraction
-for the eye, and in this picture marks emphasis
-Number One. Emphasis Number Two occurs near the
-middle of the road at the turn, where four or more lines
-meet to form a cross. These lines are produced by
-the basic line already described, by the conspicuous<span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">65</span>
-tree, and by the hedge which runs up to it from the
-left side of the bottom frame. Here again are illustrated
-visual laws already discussed. The third emphasis
-in this picture is where the road runs out on the
-left, our eyes being drawn in that direction by the
-familiar device of converging lines. Observe that the
-mass of trees in the background forms a distinct wedge
-with the point toward the left, that the wagon train
-itself tapers sharply, that the three trees along the road
-are successively smaller toward the left, and that the
-field on that side of the road tapers somewhat in the
-same direction. The combined effect of these converging
-lines and tapering shapes carries our vision
-along the road so insistently that we follow it in
-imagination beyond the frame.</p>
-
-<p>Thus by the magic of pictorial design our vision is
-caught and so controlled that a single glance, sweeping
-the picture in the direction ordained by the artist,
-gives us a definite feeling of movement. No matter
-who looks, or how often, he will see the accents in the
-order we have named—covered wagon, turn of the
-road, far end of the road—and will thus get the main
-story of the picture in the shortest time, the simplest
-terms, and with the right emphasis. If this picture
-were to be thrown upon the screen for only a second
-we are confident that every spectator would instantly
-get the primary meaning, (1) wagon loads of merry-makers
-(2) are swinging (3) up the road. There
-are minor interests, too, such as the comic figures
-and actions of the characters, the prancing of dogs and
-horses, the rustic cottage, the tops of trees, clouds,
-etc.; but these are kept subsidiary in the design and
-yet, as they emerge one by one, they are found to be<span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">66</span>
-in complete harmony with the main theme, the movement
-of merry-makers along a country road.</p>
-
-<p>Of course, if a scene like this were filmed and
-thrown upon the screen, the wagon train would actually
-be moving, and we would perceive the motion,
-rather than infer it or feel it, as we do from the
-fixed design of the drawing. Yet, if the cinema director
-were indifferent as to where he placed his accents,
-and trusted to chance for his pictorial pattern,
-we would surely not perceive that motion in its full
-significance. Now, if lines, shapes and tonal values
-in a certain arrangement can clarify and emphasize
-the message of a picture, it is obvious that in some
-other arrangement they could obscure and minimize
-that message. For example, if “Derby Day” were
-filmed, and the composition were left to accident or
-to the bungling of some director ignorant of the laws
-of design, it is quite probable that he would “feature”
-the “picturesque” cottage, or perhaps a “cunning” dog,
-a “scenic” tree, the “patriotic pull” of the flag, or the
-“side-splitting” corpulency of a woman. No spectator
-would then see or feel the dominant idea of this
-subject, which is the joy of going away on the open
-road.</p>
-
-<p>Right here it is a pleasure to state for the benefit
-of any reader who may not have seen “The Covered
-Wagon,” that James Cruze, the director of that
-photoplay, did not bungle his composition. Always
-the historic wagon train of the pioneers strikes the
-dominant note of the scene, seeming to compose itself
-spontaneously into a pictorial pattern which accents
-the dramatic meaning. This is true even when
-there is no physical movement. In the arroyo scene,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">67</span>
-for example, facing <a href="#Page_93">page 93</a>, the wagons, drawn up
-into formation for a camp, harmonize sternly with the
-savage-looking cliffs, and their zigzag arrangement
-somehow suggests the sharp action of the fight with
-the Indians which fate holds in store for this very
-place.</p>
-
-<p>Enough has now been said to illustrate how design
-in a picture can control our attention during the
-pauses and arrested moments on the screen, and by
-so doing can relieve the eyes of unnecessary, wasteful
-work and give unity and emphasis to the message of
-the picture. But still other powers reside in design.
-While it hastens our grasp of meanings, and even accentuates
-those meanings, it can affect the mind in
-other ways that are still more important. And if we
-delve deeper into these ways we shall come out with
-a clearer vision of the artistic possibilities of the
-movies.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_68" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">68</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V.<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">RHYTHM AND REPOSE IN FIXED DESIGN</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">Directness,</span> ease, emphasis, unity—these are the
-things which we have just demanded of cinema composition,
-the pictorial form which contains, and at the
-same time reveals, the story of a photoplay. But we
-demand something more. We do not get complete
-æsthetic pleasure from any composition which merely
-contains and reveals something else. The vessel, while
-serving to convey its treasure, should have a charm of
-its own. In poetry, for example, we are not satisfied
-with the language which merely expresses the poetic
-content in clear and forceful style. We crave poetic
-language, too, words and sentences that sound like
-music and that by their very form appeal to our fancy.</p>
-
-<p>In fact most people who have a highly developed
-taste for pictorial art, consider that beauty of treatment
-is more important than beauty of subject. Their
-emotions are stirred by something in the arrangement
-of the lines, masses, tones, and colors, something that
-serves other purposes than those of clearness, coherence,
-and emphasis. What that something is, has
-always been a great question to students of æsthetics.
-Mr. Clive Bell, for example, suggests that the essential
-beauty of art lies in “significant form.” But you<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">69</span>
-have to read through his very interesting book entitled
-“Art” to get some notion of what he means by that
-term. Miss Ethel D. Puffer, in her book “The Psychology
-of Beauty,” has developed the very illuminating
-theory that the effect of beauty on the human
-mind is both to stimulate and give repose. And we
-shall adopt her theory for a while as a basis for a
-brief discussion of rhythm and balance in cinematic
-forms.</p>
-
-<p>The terms “stimulation and repose,” are, of course,
-contrary. The feelings which they describe are in
-conflict. Yet this inner conflict between stimulation
-and repose always takes place when a person is faced
-with great beauty of art or nature. Any one of us
-can testify to that from experience. When listening
-to music, when reading a poem, when watching a
-play, when gazing at a temple, at a statue, or a painting,
-we have felt something strangely stirring and at
-the same time soothing, something both kindling and
-cooling, an inspiration to do great deeds, and at the
-same time a desire to rest for the while in satisfied
-contemplation.</p>
-
-<p>Applying this theory to pictorial composition on
-the screen, we may say that the quality of balance in
-line, pattern, and tone suggests repose, while pulsating
-rhythm stimulates us to activity. This application at
-least has the merit of giving us something definite to
-discuss.</p>
-
-<p>Looking at the mechanical aspects of balance in a
-picture we shall see that it can easily be analyzed.
-There is the balance of quantity which may be seen
-by comparing the right half of the picture with the
-left half, or the upper half with the lower half. Balance<span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">70</span>
-of quantity is often connected with symmetry
-in the fundamental pattern, as in the figure of the triangle.
-Further, there is balance through depth, the
-foreground weighing against the background. Another
-kind of balance is that of echoing motifs, a sort
-of fulfillment of the eye’s expectations. There is also
-a balance of interests, which is quite different from
-the balance of quantity, because a small quantity of
-one thing may have greater weight of interest than a
-large quantity of something else. And there is the
-balance of contrasts, such as light against shadow, or
-straight lines against curved lines. How balance in
-all of these forms may be obtained in cinema composition
-will be discussed in the first half of this
-chapter.</p>
-
-<p>One of the simplest tests for balance in a static
-picture is to draw a vertical line through the center
-of the picture, and then to estimate the weight, so to
-speak, of the two halves of the composition thus
-formed. If we try the experiment with the “still”
-from the photoplay “Maria Rosa,” facing <a href="#Page_71">page 71</a>,
-we see at once that the left half is too heavy. Besides
-containing by far the greater dramatic interest, it contains
-too many objects, shapes, and lines to attract the
-eye.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_071" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 35em;">
- <img src="images/i_071.jpg" width="2186" height="1650" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>Maria Rosa</i>. An interesting composition, but thrown out of balance by too much
-weight in the left half. See <a href="#Page_70">page 70</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>Now if this “still” were a student’s painting which
-fell under the eye of the master, he might suggest
-various ways of “saving” it. For example, some of
-the bric-a-brac might be “painted out” from the dressing
-table, the lower lines of the mirror might be
-softened, and the door reflected in the mirror might
-be painted out, while some similar interest might be
-painted in at the right of the picture. Or if this “still”<span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">71</span>
-were an amateur print for your kodak album, you
-might improve the picture considerably by trimming
-off the right end as far as the woman’s skirt; that
-is, about one-fifth of the entire width. You can estimate
-the value of that improvement right now by
-shutting off that part of the “still” with a sheet of
-paper or any convenient thing that may be used as
-a mask. Another picture may be formed by shutting
-off the left third, just including the reflection of the
-woman in the mirror. What then remains is a composition
-in beautiful balance, which, incidentally,
-appeals more strongly to the imagination than the
-“still” taken as a whole.</p>
-
-<p>But neither trimming nor repainting nor retouching
-can be employed to alter a bad grouping that has
-been recorded on a film. We sympathize, therefore,
-with the conscientious cinema composer who has made
-a mistake in composition, for he is forced either to
-“shoot” the scene again or to clip it out entirely from
-the film.</p>
-
-<p>Another test for balance of quantity is to draw a
-horizontal line through the center of the composition
-and weigh the visual values in the upper and lower
-halves thus formed. In the case of horizontal divisions,
-however, we have accustomed ourselves to
-expect greater weight at the bottom, because that is
-the natural arrangement of material things about us.
-Keeping this fact in mind let us analyze the “still”
-from “Audrey,” facing <a href="#Page_45">page 45</a>. A glance shows us
-that the composition is top-heavy, for almost everything
-of interest lies above the center line. But turn
-the picture upside down, and look upon it as though
-it were a pattern meant to be viewed in that position;<span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">72</span>
-you feel immediately that the distribution of weights
-is more pleasing. Now hold it as if the right end
-were the bottom, and the composition takes on a heavy
-balance, with a commonplace symmetry of four long,
-rising and spreading lines. This is so because the
-right half, which is really too heavy when the picture
-is viewed in the position intended by the director,
-seems to be a weight in place when considered as the
-bottom of a pattern.</p>
-
-<p>Yet we may find beauty in this “still,” if we only
-have the patience to corner it. Cover up three-quarters
-of the composition, that is, all of the left half,
-and all of the lower half; then the remaining quarter
-will contain a pleasant composition, and a delightful
-appeal to the imagination. There is in that upper
-right-hand quarter, both balance and rhythm, both
-repose and stimulation. The heroine’s gestures carry
-our attention to the left, in the direction she is going;
-but her glances, and the attracting power of the converging
-trees, carry our attention to the right. And
-in the course of this easy playing to and fro our fancy
-swings out beyond the frame into realms of our own
-imagination.</p>
-
-<p>But there is still another test for pictorial equilibrium.
-Besides the balance of one side against the
-other and of the top against the bottom, a picture
-should preserve a balance between the foreground and
-the background. This assumes that the picture really
-suggests the dimension of depth, which is usually
-the case. Interesting exceptions, however, may appear
-occasionally, as in the “still” facing <a href="#Page_61">page 61</a>, and the
-painting facing <a href="#Page_76">page 76</a>. One may even find entire
-photoplays with scenes done in two dimensions only.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">73</span>
-For example, “Moon-Gold,” a Will Bradley production,
-released in 1921, presents a story of Pierrot,
-Columbine, and Harlequin in a series of scenes in a
-single plane. There is no background except blackness,
-and there is no foreground at all. The pictures
-are as flat as a poster. Such elimination of setting
-may have artistic merit, especially in stories of familiar
-or naïve themes, but in more involved stories it is
-desirable to include the whole setting of the action,
-not only because of the dramatic power of environment,
-but also because of the pictorial wealth which
-may thus be added.</p>
-
-<p>To test this third balance of a picture you need
-only imagine a curtain of glass dropped so as to separate
-equally the interests near the spectator from those
-farther away. Such a plane is, in fact, usually
-imagined by a painter when he lays out his design.
-Though he does not cut his ground mechanically into
-two equal areas, he usually does distribute his subjects
-so that the spectator needs not feel that the foreground
-is only a long waste to be crossed, or that
-the background is but an empty region which lies
-beyond everything of interest.</p>
-
-<p>The word “depth” in connection with the screen
-has doubtless made our readers think of the stereoscopic
-motion picture as produced by the Teleview
-and other companies. Such pictures are truly remarkable
-in their mechanical power of showing physical
-depth through a scene. They show you the images
-clearly separated, some near and some far away,
-so that you feel as if you could really walk in and
-out among them. To be able to produce such an
-illusion is something that any inventor may well be<span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">74</span>
-proud of; and yet it is doubtful that the stereoscopic
-picture will bring about any improvement in the artistic
-composition of the motion picture. Most of us can
-recall the “stereoscope and views” which we used to
-find on the center tables of our country aunts. How
-well we remember the mystifying illusion of depth
-which was created. How well we remember also that
-there was the same depth in the reeking stockyards
-of Kansas City as in the cathedral aisle of Rheims!
-That illustrates the shortcoming of purely mechanical
-things in the service of art. The stereoscopic machinery
-cannot in itself create beauty. It cannot automatically
-so select trees or distribute people over a
-landscape that balance and rhythm, unity and emphasis
-will appear in the finished picture. Unfortunately,
-for the uninspired artist, the mechanician cannot help
-him.</p>
-
-<p>It may be asked whether stereoscopic pictures may
-not be utilized to get sculptural effects upon the screen.
-The answer is that if a piece of sculpture had to be
-viewed through a single peep-hole and under an
-unchanging light it would not really have a sculptural
-appeal. The characteristic appeal of sculpture is due
-largely to the fact that it is possible for the beholder
-to shift his gaze at will from one side of the statue
-to the other. He even walks around the statue, thus
-getting ever new aspects of the subject until he has
-completed the circle of inspection. And this shifting
-view is governed entirely by his own interest and
-choice. The sculptor has deliberately shaped his
-marble so that the many aspects will be interesting
-variations of the same theme. That many-sidedness
-of sculpture is one of its distinctive qualities as art.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">75</span>
-But when you look at a stereoscopic motion picture it
-is absolutely impossible for you to “see around” the
-objects any farther than the camera has done, no matter
-how much you shift your position. The other
-sides of all the objects and figures might as well be
-missing. Your point of view is fixed absolutely in
-the stereoscopic picture, just as it is in the ordinary
-“flat” picture. But perhaps there are other ways in
-which the Teleview and similar inventions can provide
-new opportunities for the cinema artist. That
-remains to be shown by experimentation, and, of
-course, such experimentation is welcome and should
-be encouraged.</p>
-
-<p>However, for all purposes of pictorial art a sufficient
-illusion of depth can be produced in the “flat” picture.
-This can be done by the simplest instruments
-and means of picture making, even by the use of a
-lead pencil and a piece of paper. There are only two
-secrets of perspective. One is to render parallel lines,
-that is, lines which are actually parallel in the subject,
-so that they converge in the distance and, if
-continued, would meet at a “vanishing point.” The
-other is to render objects with increasing dimness as
-they occupy positions at increasing distances away
-from us.</p>
-
-<p>One might suppose that in a photograph these problems
-of perspective would take care of themselves.
-But they do not, as may be seen by turning to the
-“still” of the conservatory scene, facing <a href="#Page_100">page 100</a>.
-There we find a jumble of stuff apparently all in the
-same vertical plane. Why does the standing woman
-wear a palm leaf in her hair? Why does the man
-wear the top of a doorway upon his head? And why<span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">76</span>
-does the seated woman bury her head in the ferns?
-They do not actually, of course, carry on thus hilariously;
-but some one has carelessly coaxed the background
-into the foreground by making remote objects
-intensely distinct, instead of subduing them into the
-soft values of distance.</p>
-
-<p>But we have dwelt so long on the subject of balance
-in design that we fear the reader may think we
-have over-emphasized the point. No one quality in
-pictorial composition should be out of balance with
-the others. Thus, too sharp an emphasis may violate
-balance, and too perfect a balance may violate rhythm.
-After all, the kind of balance we desire in pictorial
-design is that which is sufficient, but no more. We
-do not, as a rule, enjoy the mathematical figure of the
-equilateral triangle, standing heavily on its base, because
-it is balanced beyond the need of any living
-thing. It suggests the dead repose of the pyramids of
-Egypt, the tombs of her forgotten kings. Such a
-severe design is utterly unsuitable, therefore, in the
-portrait of a lithe young lady clad in silks and tulle,
-as illustrated in the “still” facing <a href="#Page_61">page 61</a>. It is flat
-and hard, and the eye following forever its monotonous
-outlines misses the variety of rhythm. Yet a triangle,
-you say, serves the purpose of unity and emphasis.
-Alter it then by making it narrower, with a less
-obvious base, and by swinging a live rhythm into its
-sides, as in the painting of “Mme. Lebrun and Her
-Daughter,” facing this page.</p>
-
-<p>But this brings us to a discussion of the mysterious
-quality of rhythm. Rhythm is entirely too evasive
-for a tight definition, but perhaps we can learn much
-by saying things about it.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_076" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 26em;">
- <img src="images/i_076.jpg" width="1664" height="2215" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><i>Mme. LeBrun and Her Daughter</i>, a painting by Mme. Vigée-Lebrun.
-A good figure composition on the basis of a triangle. Compare
-<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">77</span>with the “still” shown facing <a href="#Page_61">page 61</a>. See also pages <a href="#Page_62">62</a> and <a href="#Page_76">76</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>Rhythm in music may be partially described as a
-peculiar alternating movement, with an alternation
-between sounds of different pitch, quality, and quantity;
-between different sound groups, and between
-sound and silence. The rhythm of visible motion is
-of a somewhat similar nature, as we shall see in Chapter
-VIII. But a sense of alternating movement may
-be produced by things which are not themselves in
-motion. We can, therefore, find rhythm in fixed lines,
-shapes, tones, colors, and textures. This we shall call
-rhythm of fixed design.</p>
-
-<p>The peculiar thing about the element of alternation
-in rhythm which distinguishes it from mere repetition,
-is that it is not regular, like the swinging of a
-pendulum, but contains numerous variations from
-regularity. But, while the symmetry of rhythm is only
-partial, so also the variety is limited. It is the combined
-effect of these two factors which makes rhythm
-delightful. Repetition or symmetry in a line or a
-pattern is pleasurable because, as explained in Chapter
-III, it enables us to see much with ease. But, at
-the same time, subtle or even bold variations are
-appealing because they relieve us of monotony, stimulate
-our interest, and lead our eyes in search of further
-variations.</p>
-
-<p>A familiar rhythm of line is that of the reverse
-curve, which Hogarth called “the line of beauty.” This
-line is beautifully used in the painting “Daylight and
-Lamplight,” facing <a href="#Page_39">page 39</a>. Observe the effect of
-alternation with variety in the lines which bound the
-urn, the woman’s figure, and the various shadows and
-lights in the background. Your eye sweeps over those
-paths without effort, and you get a sense of movement,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">78</span>
-as though you yourself were drawing these lines with
-a brush or crayon. Analyze the composition and you
-will see how richly the lines are woven together. Compare
-all the small curves with each other, compare all
-the larger curves, all the short straight lines, all the
-longer straight lines, etc., and you will discover an
-amazing amount of alternation and repetition, with
-an equally amazing amount of deviation from regularity.</p>
-
-<p>Imagine that the painting which we have just
-analyzed is an accented moment in a motion picture,
-and you must imagine another similar design a few
-seconds earlier in the action and still another one a
-few seconds later, as the woman walks gracefully
-through the room. In fact, there would be a whole
-series of similar designs during the brief time that
-the woman’s figure and the urn are in decorative contact.
-The instant of action which the painter has
-chosen to fix on canvas might well be the same instant
-which you would select as the pictorial climax in this
-motion picture. This climax, accented perhaps with
-a pause, accented also by the pictorial approach and
-departure, is something which you would long remember
-as a rhythmical moment in the photoplay.</p>
-
-<p>In the picture which we have just described the
-rhythm is found chiefly in the continuity and richness
-of line and in a certain active balancing of similar
-with dissimilar lines. The design is simple, almost
-plain. It is a single pattern which does not recur
-again within the frame. Quite different in type is the
-composition of a group picture such as “The Banquet
-of the Officers of St. Andrew,” facing <a href="#Page_79">page 79</a>, where
-the rhythm is in the flow of patterns rather than in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">79</span>
-the flow of lines. Take a hat, for example, as the
-decorative theme and observe how definitely, yet how
-subtly, that theme is four times varied. Note further
-how the curves of the hats are echoed, always with
-variety, in the ruffs.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_079a" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 27em;">
- <img src="images/i_079a.jpg" width="1695" height="1339" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>Polly of the Circus</i>. Compare this “still” with <i>Banquet of the
-Officers of St. Andrew</i> (below) and you get at once the distinct impression
-that the painting depicts a larger crowd than the “still.” As a
-matter of fact, the painter has used only twelve men to produce his
-effect, while the motion picture director has employed seventeen men,
-a woman, and a horse. This difference illustrates the practical utility
-of pictorial design. See <a href="#Page_57">page 57</a>.</div></div>
-
-<div id="if_i_079b" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 27em;">
- <img src="images/i_079b.jpg" width="1700" height="1119" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><i>Banquet of the Officers of St. Andrew</i>, a painting by Frans Hals.
-See above and <a href="#Page_78">page 78</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>But so many curves would make the picture too rich
-in quality were it not for the skillful introduction of
-straight lines to make, as it were, a series of alternating
-notes. You observe immediately the long
-straight lines of the windows, of the two flags, and
-of the table. But you do not at first observe that there
-are several dozen shorter straight lines, and that, curiously
-enough, they are nearly all parallel to each other.
-Take as a key the sash of the first seated officer, counting
-from the left, and you will find a surprising number
-of similarities to this motif throughout the composition,
-all the way from the shadows on the window
-casing in the upper left hand corner to the edge of the
-table in the lower right hand corner. Yet, because
-these similar straight lines are so frequently alternated
-with varying curves, we get from the picture a
-stirring sense of a swinging movement.</p>
-
-<p>Here, again, is an arrested moment of action which
-might conceivably have come out of a motion picture.
-What the arrangement of the twelve men might have
-been at other moments of the scene we do not know.
-Perhaps they were all sitting when the scene opened;
-perhaps they had all arisen before it closed; but for
-this one instant, at least, they have resolved themselves
-into an interesting design of simple patterns in a
-rhythmical series.</p>
-
-<p>Another source of rhythm in a fixed picture may
-be the tonal gradations. In a painting there would be<span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">80</span>
-a play of colors from hue to hue and from tint to
-shade. In ordinary photography there may be a
-similar play from deep black to intense white through
-all the intervening values. It is all a question of lighting
-and choice of subjects for the light to fall upon.
-The painter has an advantage over the photographer
-because he does not have to record light and shadow
-exactly as they are on the subject. He can soften his
-shadows or paint them out completely. He can alter
-his tones and values at will, even after the painting
-is practically finished. As an offset to this the cinema
-composer has, of course, the power of presenting
-movement, fugues and passages of light and shadow.
-And, by the use of the newest apparatus for lighting,
-and by careful attention to the color values and textures
-of sets, costumes, etc., he can also produce many
-of the rhythmical effects of gradation in fixed tones
-which we are accustomed to look for in painting.</p>
-
-<p>As time goes on we shall more and more often find
-pictorial moments on the screen which exhibit as fine
-a rhythm of fixed tones and masses as, for example,
-Van Dyck’s “Portrait of Charles I,” facing <a href="#Page_163">page 163</a>.
-If you draw a straight line across this picture in almost
-any direction, it will mark a great variety of
-graded values, a lovely shifting of light and shadow,
-with no sharp contrasts except those which serve to
-attract the spectator’s attention to the head of the
-king. There is perfect harmony of composition here.
-The tones are in a rhythmical design, yet it is a rhythm
-which keeps the emphasis on the focal interest and
-preserves the balance throughout the painting.</p>
-
-<p>Two or three men, a horse, and a bit of landscape
-is no uncommon subject in photoplays. We have reason,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">81</span>
-therefore, to expect that from long practice all
-directors will learn how to treat it pictorially, and
-with ever new variety of beauty.</p>
-
-<p>The general field of composition in fixed design has
-now been surveyed. We have tried to show that a
-good pictorial composition, even from a commercial
-point of view, is one which provides instant emphasis
-on the focal interest; which unites this focal interest
-with the other parts of the picture by means of a certain
-arrangement, or pattern; which keeps all of its
-values in a reposeful balance, and which pulsates with
-a vital rhythm. These four qualities—emphasis, unity,
-balance, and rhythm—are necessary in what might be
-called the mechanics of beauty, the technique of design.
-We admit, cheerfully, that the beauty of a given masterpiece
-cannot be explained by pointing out an observance
-of certain fundamental laws of design, for an
-uninspired artist might obey all these laws without
-ever achieving beauty, just as a machinist might obey
-all the laws of mechanics without ever inventing a
-machine. But we insist that an observance of pictorial
-laws is a first condition that must be fulfilled by the
-artist before the mysterious quality of beauty will
-arise in his work.</p>
-
-<p>The accented moment in a pictorial movement,
-which we have studied from so many angles, is, of
-course, not fixed on the screen for any great length
-of time, never for more than a few seconds, though
-it may remain fixed in memory for years. Nor is it
-a separate thing upon the screen. It rises from an
-earlier moment and flows into a later one. The rapid
-succession of momentarily fixed pictures on the screen
-is, in fact, what gives the illusion of motion. Yet it<span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">82</span>
-would not, therefore, be correct to say that the motion
-picture as a whole can be made beautiful by making
-each separate exposure in itself a beautiful composition.
-The successive pictures must play, one into the next,
-in a stream of composition which contains
-new delights for the eye, and which, alas, contains
-new dangers for the ignorant or careless maker of
-pictures. What these delights and dangers are we
-shall see in the following chapters.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_83" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">83</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">MOTIONS IN A PICTURE</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">Pictorial</span> motion is thousands of years older than the
-motion picture. It is as old as the oldest art of all,
-the dance. Before man had learned how to weave his
-own fancies into plots, or how to make drawings of
-things that he saw, he had doubtless often feasted his
-eyes upon the rhythmic beauty created by dancers.
-Their art was the composition of motions. We can
-well imagine how they began by exhibiting bodily postures,
-gestures, and mimicry; how they proceeded to
-add other movements, such as the fluttering of garments,
-the brandishing of weapons, the waving of
-flaring torches, and how they, in time, made their
-composition more involved by swinging themselves
-into swaying groups, circling and threading fanciful
-patterns.</p>
-
-<p>As a form of art the dance has been preserved
-through the ages in an apparently unbroken history.
-And it has had various off-shoots besides; for religious
-and secular processions, pantomime, and even drama,
-have had their beginnings in the dance. Pictorial
-motion was to be seen two thousand years ago in the
-Roman triumphs and processions, whose gaudiest features
-survive in the familiar circus parade of today.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">84</span>
-And the circus itself is in a sense the pictorial motion
-of animals and men.</p>
-
-<p>In the presentation of drama, too, pictorial motion
-has always played a vital part. When we look back
-over the history of the theater we see that the managers
-were never satisfied with the mere physical
-exhibition of actors and dancers, but began very early
-to add other motions to their performance. A large
-variety of motions was added by bringing animals
-upon the scenes. Fire was put into the service of
-show. We know that its flame and flicker, borne in
-torches or beating upon the witches’ caldron, was not
-uncommon on Shakespeare’s stage. Water in the
-form of leaping cascades and playing fountains was
-used at least two hundred years ago to make the scene
-more pictorial. More recently, wind has been produced
-artificially in order to give motion to draperies,
-flags, or foliage.</p>
-
-<p>All this amounts to something far more than an
-attempt to bring nature upon the stage. It is the
-creation of new beauty. The kind of beauty which
-professional entertainers have for thousands of years
-spun together from various motions into patterns
-simple or subtle, is the beauty of art, for it comes from
-human personality expressing itself in forms and combinations
-never found as such in nature.</p>
-
-<p>Now, if these showmen are really artists, at least
-in intent, we may well ask how they have combined
-their motions so as to produce the pleasing effects
-which they desired. Have they worked hit-or-miss
-and achieved beauty only by accident, or have they
-intentionally or instinctively obeyed certain laws of
-the human eye and mind?</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">85</span></p>
-
-<p>How does the director of a motion picture make
-sure that pleasing motion will appear upon the screen?
-Does he alter, or select, his subjects? Does he choose
-his point of view? Does he patiently wait for the
-right moment? Or must beauty come by accident, as
-music might come from a cat’s running over the keyboard
-of a piano?</p>
-
-<p>There must be laws of pictorial motion, just as
-there are laws of color, design, modelling, architectural
-construction, all of which appeal to the eye without
-visible motion. And, since the motion picture can
-capture and combine and reproduce a greater variety
-of moving things than was ever before possible in
-the history of art, it seems particularly important
-that we make earnest efforts to find out under what
-laws these manifold motions may be organized into
-art.</p>
-
-<p>In studying the movies one might easily come to
-the conclusion that some directors aim only to make
-motions life-like. Their whole creed seems to be that
-a heart-broken woman should move her shoulders and
-chest as though she really were heart-broken, that a
-goat should act exactly like a goat, and that a windmill
-should behave itself exactly like a windmill. Now,
-it may be very desirable, as far as it goes, that an
-emotion be “registered” fitly. But to aim at fitting
-expression alone is to aim at naturalness alone. And
-this is not enough, because there may be natural ugliness,
-and because even the beauty of nature is essentially
-different from the beauty of art.</p>
-
-<p>Shakespeare’s plays are not admired simply because
-they reveal human character truthfully. Rembrandt’s
-paintings are not preserved in museums merely because<span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">86</span>
-they are truthful representations of Dutchmen. The
-Venus of Milo would not have a room to herself in
-the Louvre if the statue were nothing more than a
-life-like figure of a woman partly dressed. In drama,
-poetry, fiction, painting, sculpture, and music, it has
-never been considered that appropriateness, naturalness,
-or truthfulness was in itself sufficient to distinguish
-the work as art. And it surely cannot be so in
-the movies.</p>
-
-<p>It certainly has not been so in the earlier arts of
-motion. The dance as a form of expression is beautiful,
-but it is so far from natural that if the average
-voter started out to express his joy or grief, or love
-or defiance, the way a dancer does on the stage, he
-would be given a free ride to the psychopathic ward.
-The stage pantomime is charming, but if you behaved
-in the presence of your true love the way Pierrot and
-Columbine behave, he or she, as the case may be,
-would probably decide that you were too much of a
-clown ever to become a responsible parent. The circus,
-too, though not properly to be classed as a form
-of art, combines and presents a vast number of interesting
-motions which you never expect to see outside
-the big tent. Dancers, pantomime actors, circus masters
-and performers, all clearly strive to collect our
-money by showing us the kind of motions which nature
-herself does not show.</p>
-
-<p>But do not become alarmed. We do not propose
-to establish a school of unnatural acting in the
-movies. Let the women and men and greyhounds and
-weeping willows and brooks be as natural as they can
-be, like themselves and not like each other. Natural,
-yes, providing they be not natural in an ugly way. If<span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">87</span>
-a brook is running in one direction as naturally as it
-can, and a greyhound is running in the opposite direction
-as naturally as he can, the combination of their
-contrary movements may not be pleasing in a motion
-picture. Art is art, not because it reflects some actual
-bit of nature, but because it is endowed with some
-beauty made by man.</p>
-
-<p>What other properties pictorial motion should have,
-besides correct representation of action has been partly
-told in Chapter III, where the demands of ease and
-economy of vision were made a condition concomitant
-with beauty. We may further apply the same tests
-which have been applied to fixed design. But, in order
-to get a firm grasp of our subject let us first reduce
-pictorial motions to their simplest forms.</p>
-
-<p>The simplest motion of all is the moving spot,
-especially when it is entirely unrelated to a setting or
-background; that is, the kind of moving spot which
-the spectator may see without at the same time seeing
-any other thing, either fixed or moving. A familiar
-example in nature is the dark dot of a bird flying high
-above us in a cloudless sky. An example from the
-screen is the effect of a ball of fire shot from a Roman
-candle through darkness, as in the battle scenes of
-Griffith’s “Birth of a Nation.” But even so simple a
-moving thing as a spot has two properties which are
-very important to the composer of motions. The moving
-spot, like all other motions, has direction and velocity.
-The buzzard soaring slowly in large circles
-affects us in one way, while the hawk swooping downward
-sharply, or the crow flying in a straight line, or
-the bat fluttering crazily in the air, affects us in quite
-a different way.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">88</span></p>
-
-<p>When direction and velocity are controlled, even a
-single moving spot may describe beautiful motion.
-Witness an airplane maneuvering high in the sky, or a
-torch waved gracefully in the darkness. Beauty
-springs from control; ugliness follows lack of control.
-But control is no easy thing in the movies, for it is
-rare indeed that a director has only a single moving
-point to manage. Almost always, he has the problem
-of relative direction and relative speed. Moving things
-must be related to other moving things, and also to
-fixed things. Even if the picture consists only of a
-torch waved against a black background, we have the
-problem of relating that motion to the four fixed lines
-of the frame of the screen.</p>
-
-<p>But can we expect a motion picture director to stop
-and think of so small a matter as a ball thrown from
-one hand to another, to ask himself whether such an
-action is beautifully related, in direction and velocity,
-to everything else in the picture, fixed or moving?
-Yes, we can expect him to do so until he becomes
-artist enough to think of these matters without stopping.
-He should think about pictorial composition
-until he can obey its laws without thought. Let him
-remember that even a flock of geese can compose
-themselves so appealingly in the sky and a herd of
-cows can wind so gracefully down a hillside that a
-tender girl and a tough hobo will gaze alike upon them
-in open-mouthed admiration.</p>
-
-<p>The geese in the sky and the cows on the hillside
-are only a lot of moving spots, until they arrange, or
-compose, themselves. They may then illustrate the
-second type of moving object, that of the moving
-line. A line may, for example, move along its own<span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">89</span>
-length in a way which pleases the eyes. Such motions
-we see in the slender waterfall, in the narrow
-stream, in such inanimate things as the long belting
-in a factory, or the glowing line of a shooting
-star, and in the files of geese, or cattle, or marching
-men.</p>
-
-<p>A line may move in other directions besides that of
-its own length. It may swing stiffly from one end,
-as in the case of a pendulum or the rays from a searchlight.
-It may wave like a streamer in the breeze. It
-may move sidewise, as in the long lines of surf that
-roll up on the beach. It may move in countless other
-manners, as in the handling of canes, swords, spears,
-golf clubs, polo mallets, whips, etc. Now, of course,
-the director ordinarily thinks of a weapon as a weapon,
-and not as a moving line. He studies the characteristic
-action of an officer drawing his sword or of a
-Hottentot hurling his spear and tries to reproduce
-them faithfully so that no small boy in the audience
-may be able to pick out flaws. This is well, so far
-as it goes. A painter would study these characteristic
-actions, too, and would suggest them with equal
-faithfulness. But he would do something more. He
-would place every object so carefully in his picture
-that its line harmonized with the four lines of the
-frame and with all of the other lines, spots, and pictorial
-values in his work.</p>
-
-<p>Now we are beginning to guess how pictorial
-motions must be composed; but first let us see what
-other kinds of motion there are. If we take another
-look at the geese in the sky we may find that they
-have composed themselves into the form of a “V” or
-a “Y” floating strangely beneath the clouds. This<span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">90</span>
-illustrates the third type of motion, the moving pattern.</p>
-
-<p>We distinguish between a moving pattern and a
-moving spot or line, because a pattern relates its separate
-elements to each other. This relation may or may
-not change as the pattern moves. Thus the V-shaped
-pattern formed by the flying geese may become sharper
-or flatter, or one side may be stretched out longer than
-the other, as the flight continues. All fixed pictures
-are patterns which do not change in form while we
-look at them, and the pictorial principles therein involved
-have been thoroughly discussed in the preceding
-chapters. But if the director wants a pattern to
-move to the right or left, up or down, away from him
-or toward him, or to change its character gradually,
-then a new problem of composition arises, and the
-solution of this new problem is both inviting and perplexing.</p>
-
-<p>It is inviting because there are so many patterns
-which gain beauty from motion or change. A fixed
-circle is not so appealing to the eye, for example, as
-a rolling hoop. A wheel standing still is not so fascinating
-as one that rotates, like the wheel of a wind
-mill, or one that rolls, like the wheel of a carriage.
-Thus also the pattern formed by the rectangular shapes
-of a train standing still does not please the eye so
-much as the harmonious change in that same pattern
-when the train swings by us and winds away into
-the distance.</p>
-
-<p>The patterns which may be compared with mathematical
-figures, such as circles, squares, triangles, diamond
-shapes, etc., are not the only ones. We are
-simply mentioning them first to make our analysis<span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">91</span>
-clear. Every group of two or more visible things,
-and nearly every visible thing in itself, must of necessity
-be looked upon as a pattern, either pleasing or
-displeasing to the eye. Therefore every motion picture
-that has been, or can be, thrown upon the screen
-describes a pattern, fixed, moving, or changing. If
-the direction and rate of these motions and changes
-can be controlled, there is hope for beauty on the
-screen; if they cannot be controlled, there is no help
-but accident.</p>
-
-<p>A peculiar type of visible motion is that which we
-have elsewhere called “moving texture.” Examples
-in nature are the changing texture of falling snow,
-the stately coiling of clouds, and the majestic weaving
-of ice floes in a river. In the movies the effect of
-moving texture is produced whenever the elements of
-the subject are so many and so small that we view
-them rather as a surface than as a design or pattern.
-It may be seen, not only in subjects from nature, but
-also in such things as a mob of people or a closely
-packed herd of cattle viewed from a high position.
-Mr. Griffith has a good eye and taste for the composition
-of moving textures, and has furnished interesting
-examples in nearly all of his larger productions.</p>
-
-<p>Now let us see how far we have gone. We have
-defined four different types of pictorial motion,
-namely, the moving spot, the moving line, the moving
-pattern, and the moving texture. They may
-appear singly or grouped. For example, in a picture
-of the old-fashioned water wheel we have a combination
-of the moving line of the stream with the moving
-pattern of the wheel. And in a picture of a small
-motor boat, seen from afar, speeding over a lake the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">92</span>
-composition contains a moving spot, the changing
-pattern of the wake, and the changing texture of the
-water. If we add to this picture a long train on
-the bank, trailing a ribbon of smoke, an airplane in
-the sky, and a sailing yacht on the lake, we have a
-subject which is difficult indeed to analyze, and infinitely
-more difficult to compose into pictorial beauty.
-Yet those are the very kinds of motion which a motion
-picture director must compose in every scene that
-he “shoots.”</p>
-
-<p>But we have not yet completed our analysis of the
-nature of pictorial motion. It has still another property,
-which we shall call “changing tonal value.”
-Changing tonal value depends upon changes in the
-amount and kind of light which falls upon the subject,
-and upon changes in the surface of the subject
-itself. For example, the shadow of a cloud passing
-over a landscape gives a slightly different hue to every
-grove or meadow, to every rock or road. To watch
-these values come and go is one of the delights of the
-nature lover.</p>
-
-<p>Nature’s supreme example of the beauty of changing
-values may be seen in a sunset playing with delicate
-splendor on sea and sky. And if this beauty
-defies the skill of painters it is because they have no
-means of representing the subtle changes which run
-through any particular hue as the moments pass by.</p>
-
-<p>The beauty of a sunset may long, perhaps forever,
-elude the cinematograph, but this machine can produce
-tonal changes in black and white at the will of
-the operator by the familiar trick of “fading in” and
-“fading out.” This camera trick is of great service
-for dramatic effects, such as the dissolving of one<span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">93</span>
-picture into another; but it has a greater power, which
-has not always been appreciated and taken advantage
-of by directors, the power of producing for the eye
-a pictorial rhythm of tonal intensities. This effect
-is somewhat like the “crescendo” and “diminuendo”
-in music.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_093" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 34em;">
- <img src="images/i_093.jpg" width="2157" height="1663" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>The Covered Wagon</i>. Distinctive rhythm of moving lines, interesting changes
-in pictorial pattern, and harmonious play of light and shade are skillfully used in this
-photoplay to intensify its dramatic meaning. See <a href="#Page_9">pages 9</a>, <a href="#Page_66">66</a> and <a href="#Page_140">140</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>When we consider that changing tonal value may
-be combined with changing direction, as well as with
-changing velocity, of moving spots, moving lines, moving
-patterns, and moving textures, we realize more
-keenly the problems of the cinema composer. His
-medium is at once extremely complex, extremely flexible,
-and extremely delicate.</p>
-
-<p>But we have not yet revealed all of the strange qualities
-of the motion picture. A unique power of the
-screen, which can never be utilized by any other
-graphic art, is that which gives motion to things that
-are themselves absolutely at rest and immovable.
-Even the pyramids of Egypt can be invested with
-apparent motion, so that their sharp lines flow constantly
-into new patterns. It can be done by simply
-moving the camera itself while the film is being exposed.
-The appeal of apparent motion in natural
-setting is familiar to any one who has ever gazed
-dreamily from the window of a railroad car or from
-the deck of a yacht sailing among islands. Apparent
-motion on the screen makes a similar appeal, which
-can be enhanced by changing distance and point of
-view and by artistic combination with real motions
-in the picture.</p>
-
-<p>Still other fresh means of pleasing the eye may be
-found in the altering of natural motions, as by the
-retarding action of the slow-motion camera, which<span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">94</span>
-can make a horse float in the air like a real Pegasus;
-or by the cinematographic acceleration of motion
-which can out-rival an Indian conjuror in making a
-tree rise, blossom, and bear fruit while you are watching.</p>
-
-<p>Another peculiar type of pictorial motion, which
-has never before existed, and does not come into
-being until it is projected upon the screen, is the
-magic motion of the “animated cartoons.” The
-camera-man sees no such marvelous motions. He
-faces only a stack of drawings. The artist who makes
-the drawings does not see the motions except in his
-own imagination. But the spectator in the theater
-is delighted to see the strangely bewitched men and
-beasts, birds and trees, rocks and streams, weapons
-and machines, all behaving in impossible ways that
-no maker of fairy tales ever dreamed of. Here is
-a new field of pictorial composition, with distant
-boundaries and fabulous wealth. Those who exploit
-it will be able to teach many a valuable lesson to the
-director who merely takes photographs of actors in
-motion.</p>
-
-<p>Nearly all of these motions might be found in a
-single “shot,” that is, in a single section of film.
-But when these sections of film are joined together
-to form the finished photoplay they produce still another
-kind of motion, a constant shifting from scene
-to scene. Whether this succession is to be a series
-of collisions or a harmonious flow, depends upon those
-who cut and join the films.</p>
-
-<p>There is finally the total movement which is the
-product of all of these motions working together.
-A scientist can show you in his laboratory that when<span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">95</span>
-a cord vibrates in one way it gives forth a particular
-note, and that when the same cord vibrates in another
-way it gives forth a different note. He can also show
-you that a single cord can vibrate in several different
-ways at the same time. The tones and overtones
-thus produced constitute the peculiar <em>timbre</em>, or quality,
-of a musical note. Thus, too, in a motion picture
-the <em>ensemble</em> of all the kinds, directions, and velocities
-of motion constitutes the particular cinematic quality
-of that particular picture play. Whether that
-resultant quality shall be like a symphony or like the
-cries of a mad-house, depends on the knowledge, the
-skill, and the inspiration of the cinema composer.</p>
-
-<p>Having named the principal motions in a picture
-we come now to the question of how those motions
-should be composed. When a musical composer sits
-down before his piano he knows that he may strike
-single notes in succession, giving a simple melody, or
-several notes at the same moment, producing a chord,
-or he may play a melody with one hand and a different
-melody with the other, or he may play a melody
-with one hand and a succession of chords with the
-other, or he may use both hands in playing two successions
-of chords. Before he is through with his
-composition he will probably have done all of those
-things.</p>
-
-<p>It is much the same with the cinema composer.
-Before he has finished even a single scene he will
-probably have produced all of the different types of
-motions in varying directions, with varying velocities,
-and varying intensities. How may he know whether
-his work is good or bad? What are the proofs of
-beauty in the composition of pictorial motion?</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">96</span></p>
-
-<p>A practical proof is dramatic utility. The motions
-of a photoplay are in the service of the story. They
-should perform that work well, without waste of time
-and energy. An æsthetic proof is their power to stimulate
-our fancy and to sway our feeling. Pictorial
-motions should play for us, until by the illusion of
-art we can play with them. Another proof is reposefulness.
-For at the very moment when we are stimulated
-by art we desire to rest in satisfied contemplation.
-How pictorial motions may produce beauty on
-the screen by being at work, at play, and at rest will
-be told in the following chapters.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_97" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">97</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">PICTORIAL MOTIONS AT WORK</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">All</span> the movement which you see on the screen may
-be enjoyed, we have said, as something which appears
-beautiful to your eye, regardless of its meaning to
-your mind. But if that movement, beautiful in itself,
-also carries to your mind some significance, if it serves
-the dramatic plot in some positive way, then the picture
-will be so much the richer. Acting, of course,
-is visible movement that delineates character and advances
-plot. It is pictorial motion at work. And acting,
-curiously enough, is not limited to people and
-animals. In a sense there may be acting also by
-things, by wagons or trees or brooks or waves or
-water-falls or fountains or flames or smoke or clouds
-or wind-blown garments. The motions of these
-things also constitute a kind of work in the service
-of the photoplay.</p>
-
-<p>One might say that the artistic efficiency of a motion
-picture may be partly tested in the same way
-as the practical value of a machine. In either case
-motions are no good unless they help to perform some
-work. “Lost motions” are a waste, and resisting motions
-are a hindrance. The best mechanical combination
-of motions, then, is that which results in the
-most work with the least expenditure of energy.</p>
-
-<p>Doubtless every one will agree with us that if, while<span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">98</span>
-a picture is showing, any great work is necessary to
-“get the story across,” that work should be done by
-the picture and not by the spectators. They want
-the story to be clear, and they want it to be impressive.
-In other words, they want beautiful and significant
-material presented with the fullest emphasis.
-Emphasis results when the attention of the spectator
-is caught and held by the primary interest in the picture,
-instead of the secondary interest. In paintings,
-or in “still” pictures, or in those parts of moving pictures
-which are held or remembered as fixed moments,
-a great number of devices may be used separately or
-together to control the attention of the spectator so
-that the main interest gets its full emphasis. Pictorial
-motions on the screen may also be so well organized
-that they will catch and control the spectator’s attention,
-and will reveal the dynamic vitality of the pictorial
-content.</p>
-
-<p>The simplest principle of accent by motion is so
-obvious that we are almost ashamed to name it. It
-is this, that if in the whole picture everything remains
-at rest except one thing which moves, that thing will
-attract our attention. Photoplays are full of mistakes
-which arise through the violation of this simple law.
-In many a scene our attention is drawn from the stalwart
-hero to a candle on the mantlepiece merely because
-its flame happens to flicker; or from the heroine’s
-sweet face to a common bush merely because its
-leaves happen to quiver in the breeze; or from the
-villain’s steady pistol to a dog’s tail merely because
-the dog happens to wag it.</p>
-
-<p>It is no excuse to say that such motions are natural,
-or that they give local color. For, though a moving<span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">99</span>
-trifle may help to give the correct atmosphere, it may
-also at the same time rob the heroine of the attention
-which is rightly due her. For example, in “The Love
-Light,” which was conceived and directed by Frances
-Marion, there is the kitchen of the little Italian home
-where Angela (Mary Pickford) sits down to muse
-for a while. She occupies the right side of the picture
-while at the left is the fire-place with a brisk
-fire. The fanciful playing of the flames and smoke
-of that fire catch our attention immediately. We guess
-that this fire-place is not important in the story, and
-we turn our glances upon the heroine, but we cannot
-keep them there because the fire is too interesting.</p>
-
-<p>When the spectator’s reason tries to make him do
-one thing and his natural inclination tempts him to
-do the opposite, there is confusion and waste of mental
-energy; and during that hesitation of mind the
-opportunity for being impressed by the main interest
-of the play passes by. That rule may sound like a
-commonplace, but it is not nearly so commonplace
-as the violation of it in the movies.</p>
-
-<p>If the director must have a fire in the fire-place,
-and if Angela is more important than that fire, then,
-of course, her motions should be made more interesting
-than its motions. It should always be remembered
-that the strangest, least familiar of two motions
-will attract our attention away from the other. The
-fire is strange, while Angela is familiar. In the preceding
-scenes she has walked, run, romped, laughed,
-cried, talked, and made faces; she has, in short, performed
-so many different kinds of motions that there
-is almost nothing unexpected left for her to do in
-order to take our eyes away from the fire. She<span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">100</span>
-merely sits for a long time unnoticed. Presently,
-however, after the fire has lost its novelty for us, she
-arises, grasps a frying pan, and, using it as a mirror,
-begins to primp. Then at last we look at her.</p>
-
-<p>A more striking case of misplaced emphasis may
-be found in the photoplay “Sherlock Holmes,” directed
-by Albert Parker. The part of the great detective
-was played by no less a person than John Barrymore,
-yet in the very scene where he makes his first appearance
-he is totally eclipsed by a calico cow. In this
-scene, represented by the “still” opposite this page,
-we see a beautifully patterned cow swinging into the
-idyllic setting of a side street in Cambridge, following
-a rhythmic path from the background with its dim
-towers of the university, past the honeysuckle-clad
-walls of “Ye Cheshire Cheese,” and out into the shadows
-of a picturesque tree. This cow holds our attention
-by her photographic contrasts of black and white,
-and because she and her attendant are the only moving
-things within the whole scope of the camera.
-This inscrutable cow gets the spotlight while the great
-Sherlock is neglected where he reclines drowsily in
-the shade. Here was really the most pictorial scene
-of the whole photoplay, and the annoying thing was
-that the cow never again showed hoof or horn. Why
-was she ever let in? No suspicion of murder, theft,
-or other deviltry was ever cast upon her. She neither
-shielded nor shamed any one. She did not help to
-solve any problem. There was no further allusion to
-cattle, dairies, or cheese. There was not even a glass
-of milk in the rest of the play.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_100a" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 27em;">
- <img src="images/i_100a.jpg" width="1718" height="1357" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">A typical bad movie composition from an old film. But the pictorial
-mistakes here illustrated may be seen in some of the most recent productions.
-Intelligent criticism by spectators would soon make such
-careless directing intolerable. See <a href="#Page_75">page 75</a>.</div></div>
-
-<div id="if_i_100b" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 28em;">
- <img src="images/i_100b.jpg" width="1757" height="1244" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>Sherlock Holmes</i>. An example of wrong emphasis. The cow
-attracts attention by her strong marking, the central position, and because
-she is the only moving thing in the picture. But the cow should not
-have been dragged in at all, much less accented. See <a href="#Page_100">page 100</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>Perhaps the innocent cow was an accident. Perhaps
-the director did not know, or had forgotten,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">101</span>
-that the whitest patch in a picture attracts the eye,
-that an irregular shape, such as the marking of a
-Holstein cow, attracts more attention than the familiar
-patterning of walls, windows, tree trunks, etc.,
-that a moving object in a scene where everything
-else is still attracts and holds attention, and that a
-humble cow emphasized by all these cinematographic
-means makes more of a hit than the most highly paid
-actor dozing in the shade.</p>
-
-<p>But the strangeness or novelty of a motion may
-emphasize it, even though other motions going on at
-the same time are larger and stronger. In support
-of this statement the author offers a personal experience
-which came in the nature of a surprise when
-first seeing Niagara Falls. One would think that if a
-person who had never seen this sight were placed
-suddenly before it, he would gaze spellbound at the
-awful rush of water, and that no other motion could
-possibly distract him. But the author’s attention was
-first attracted to something else which impressed him
-more deeply, something which moved silently, very
-slowly and very delicately. That strangely attractive
-thing was the cloud of spray that rose steadily from
-the bottom of the fall, floating gently upward past
-the brink and vanishing continually in the sky. Its
-peculiar appeal lay in its strangeness, not in its
-strength.</p>
-
-<p>The reader can doubtless recall similar cases where
-strangeness exerted an overpowering appeal. At best
-that strangeness is much more than the satisfaction
-of curiosity. It is a type of beauty which comes as
-a relief from the common, familiar facts of every-day
-life. The combination of strangeness and beauty has<span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">102</span>
-a powerful charm, and he is an ideal director who
-can emphasize dramatic significance with that charm.</p>
-
-<p>Violence, at least, is not a virtue in the movies, as
-so many directors seem to believe. Indeed, slowness
-and slightness may sometimes be more impressive than
-speed and volume. This is often demonstrated on
-the stage of the spoken drama, when, for example,
-the leading lady who speaks slowly and in low tones
-holds our interest better than her attendants who
-chatter in high pitch. The beauty of her speech is
-emphasized by its contrast with the ugliness of the
-others. So in the photoplay there may be more power
-in a single slight lowering of the eyes or in the firm
-clenching of a fist than in a storm of waving arms
-and heaving chests.</p>
-
-<p>What has just been said refers to motions in a fixed
-setting, which operate either against or in spite of,
-each other; but two or more motions in a picture may
-work as a team, and may thus control our attention
-better than if they were operating singly.</p>
-
-<p>First we observe that if a single object is moving
-along in a continuous direction it will pull our attention
-along in that direction, may, indeed, send our
-attention on ahead of the object. Thus if an actor
-swings his hand dramatically in the direction of a
-door he may carry our glance beyond his hand to
-the door itself. This law of vision works so surely
-that it can always be depended upon by a magician,
-a highly specialized kind of actor, when he wishes
-to divert the attention of his audience from some
-part of the stage or of his own person where a trick
-is being prepared. It is not true, as is popularly supposed,
-that we are deceived because “the hand is<span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">103</span>
-faster than the eye”; it is really because the eye is
-faster than the hand. In other words, our attention
-outstrips the moving object.</p>
-
-<p>In the movies this law controls our attention to
-traveling persons, vehicles, and things. If horsemen
-are represented as riding away they should be photographed
-with their backs toward us and with the
-distance between us and them increasing. Then, since
-our eyes travel beyond the riders, we get a stronger
-impression that the men are really riding far away.
-On the other hand, if the horsemen are coming home,
-the direction of movement should naturally be toward
-us. This seems clear enough; yet directors frequently
-prevent us from feeling the dramatic intent and force
-of travel, by “shooting” the moving subject from
-various angles in succession. Even Mr. Griffith has
-been guilty of this sort of carelessness. In “The Idol
-Dancer,” for example, we have a scene (a) in which
-a party of South Sea island villagers are paddling
-away in a large canoe; correctly enough they are moving
-away from the camera. The next scene (b) shows
-some one raising an alarm in the village by beating
-a drum, which, as we have been informed, can be
-heard twenty miles away. It is a call to the canoe
-party to return. The scene which is then flashed on
-(c) is a close-up of the canoe coming toward the
-camera. The men are paddling vigorously. We think,
-of course, that they have already heard the alarm and
-are now returning. But no! Presently they stop paddling
-and listen. They hear the drum. The next picture
-(d), a “long shot,” shows the canoe being
-maneuvered around, and the succeeding pictures all
-show the men paddling toward the camera.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">104</span></p>
-
-<p>Now it is perfectly logical for us to infer that the
-canoe is already homeward bound, when we see it
-coming toward us in scene “c” immediately after
-the drum has sounded the alarm, and we can therefore
-only resent being caught in error and virtually
-told, two scenes later, “This time we won’t fool
-you, now the canoe, as you see, is really turning
-about.”</p>
-
-<p>If one moving object can send our thoughts ahead
-to the goal of its travel, two or more objects moving
-toward the same point can send our thoughts there
-with greatly increased force. Thus a picture of two
-ships shown approaching each other on converging
-courses will surely make us think of that region of
-the sea where they are likely to come close aboard
-each other. If there is an enemy submarine at that
-point and if the two vessels are destroyers, the suspense
-and emphasis is complete.</p>
-
-<p>A similar law of attention may be seen at work in
-cases where lines move along their length to a junction.
-Suppose we take as a setting a western landscape
-in which two swiftly flowing streams meet and
-form the figure of a “Y.” Suppose now that we
-desire to place an Indian camp in this setting so carefully
-that it will attract attention as soon as the picture
-is flashed on the screen. We must place it at
-the junction of the two streams, because the eyes of
-the spectators will naturally be drawn to that point.
-Now suppose that a long white road crosses the main
-stream just below the place where the tributaries meet.
-The position would be emphasized more than ever
-because the road would virtually form two fixed lines
-leading toward the bridge; and fixed lines, as we saw<span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">105</span>
-in Chapter IV, also have the power of directing our
-attention to the point where a crossing is made.</p>
-
-<p>Then let us suppose that the Indians build a fire,
-from which the smoke rises in a tall, thin column.
-That would constitute another line of motion. But
-would it emphasize or weaken the center of interest?
-It would, as a matter of fact, still hold our attention
-on the camp because of the curious law that, no matter
-in what directions lines may move, it is the point
-which they have in common that attracts our attention.
-Thus if we assume a landscape where there
-is only a single stream, with a camp at the upper
-end, and with smoke rising from a fire, we would
-still have emphasis on the camp, in spite of the fact
-that the two lines of motion are directed away from it.</p>
-
-<p>The same curious power over our attention may be
-exercised by moving spots. If we see, for example,
-two ships sailing away on diverging courses, we immediately
-suppose that the ships are sailing out of
-the same port, and, even though we cannot see any
-sign of that port, our minds will search for it. So
-also in those electric advertisements where lines of
-fire, sprayed from a central source, rise and curve over
-into the various letters of a word, the emphasis is
-rather on the point where the lines originate than on
-any single letter or on the word as a whole. Electric
-signs, by the way, are surprisingly often examples of
-what not to do with motion if one desires to catch the
-eye and to strike deep into the mind and emotions of
-the observer. The most common mistake, perhaps,
-is the sign consisting of a word in steady light surrounded
-by a flashing border in which a stream of
-fire flows continuously from dusk till dawn. Our<span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">106</span>
-eyes chase madly around with this motion and have
-no chance to rest upon the word for which the advertiser
-is wasting his money.</p>
-
-<p>But, to return to the question of how motions running
-away from each other can throw the spectator’s
-attention to the point where they originate, we can
-think of no more perfect example in nature than the
-effect which is produced by throwing a pebble into a
-pool. Ripples form themselves immediately into expanding
-rings which seem to pursue each other steadily
-away from a common center. Yet, despite the outward
-motion of these rings our eyes constantly seek
-the point from which they so mysteriously arise.
-That this is true every reader has experienced for
-himself. Here then we have discovered a fascinating
-paradox of motion, namely, that a thing may sometimes
-be caught by running away from it. This ought
-to be good news to many a movie director.</p>
-
-<p>But let us see what other means there are of emphasizing
-a theme or some other feature of significant
-beauty in a photoplay. One method is repetition.
-But what is the effect of repetition? Is it monotony
-or emphasis? Does it dull our senses or sharpen
-them? There can be no doubt that the steady repetition
-of the sea waves breaking on the beach, or of
-rain drops dripping on our roofs, or of leaves rustling
-in the forest, or of flames leaping in our fire-places
-can send us into the forgetfulness of sleep. But, on
-the other hand, the periodic repetition of a movement
-in a dance, or of a motif in music, or of a refrain in
-poetry can drive that movement, that motif, or that
-refrain so deeply into our souls that we never forget
-it. We refer, of course, to the higher forms of dancing,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">107</span>
-music, and poetry; for in the lower forms, such
-as the dancing of savages, the grinding of hand organs,
-and the “sing-song” of uninspired recitations the too
-frequent repetition soon results in monotony.</p>
-
-<p>In the movies of to-day there is, we are glad to
-observe, very little bad repetition except that of close-ups,
-and even they are now more and more eliminated
-by directors. But there is also very little good repetition
-in the cause of artistic emphasis. The tendency
-is rather a touch and run. Seventy settings are used
-where seventeen would give us a stronger sense of
-environment. We read more publicity “dope” about
-a woman who can do a hundred “stunts” in five reels
-than about one who can strike a single enthralling
-pose, and can return to it again and again until it
-becomes as unforgettable as a masterpiece of sculpture.</p>
-
-<p>The photoplay needs repetition, especially because
-of the fact that any pictorial motion or moment must
-by its very nature vanish while we look. Hence, unless
-all other circumstances are especially favorable for
-emphasis, such a motion or moment may vanish from
-our minds as well as from the screen. To fix these
-fleeting values is a problem, but it can be solved without
-the danger of monotony if each repetition is provided
-with a variety of approach, or if each repetition
-is made under a variety of circumstances. This is
-the method in music. A particular series of notes is
-struck and serves for a theme; then the melody wanders
-off into a maze of harmony and returns to the
-theme, only to wander off again into a new harmony
-and to return from a new direction to the same theme.
-After a while this musical theme, thus repeated with
-a variety of approach, penetrates our souls and remains<span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">108</span>
-imbedded there long after the performance has ceased.
-The same method is often employed to give emphasis
-to a particular movement or pose in æsthetic dancing.</p>
-
-<p>To show how repetition with variety of approach
-may operate on the screen let us remake in imagination
-some scenes from Griffith’s “Broken Blossoms,”
-a photoplay which was adapted from Thomas Burke’s
-short story “The Chink and the Child.” The wistful
-heroine, called simply The Girl, played charmingly
-by Lillian Gish, is shown in the wretched hovel of her
-father, “Battling” Burrows, a prize-fighter. We see
-her against a background of fading and broken walls,
-a bare table, a couple of chairs, a cot, and a stove.
-If she sits down, stands up, lies down, or walks across
-the room, she moves, of course, through a changing
-pattern of motion against fixed lines. And she ends
-each movement in a different fixed design. Now let
-us suppose that the most pictorial of all these arrested
-moments is the one which is struck when she pauses
-before an old mirror to gaze sadly at her own pathetic
-image, and that during this moment we see, not only
-the best arrangement of lines, patterns, and tones, and
-the best phase of all her bodily movements, but also
-the most emotional expression of her tragic situation
-as the slave of her brutal father. Wouldn’t it be a
-pity if this pictorial moment were to occur once only
-during the play? How much more impressive it would
-be if she paused often before this mirror, always
-striking the same dramatic note. Such a pause would
-be quite natural immediately after she enters the
-room or when she is about to go out, or during her
-weary shuffling between the stove and the table while
-serving supper, or after she has arisen from a spell<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">109</span>
-of crying on the cot and tries to shape her tear-stained
-face into a smile. In all of these cases there would
-be variety and yet emphasis, always the same tonal
-harmony between her blond hair and the faded wall,
-always the same resemblance between the lines of
-her ragged dress and those of the old furniture, always
-the same binding of her frail figure into the hard pattern
-of her surroundings, as though she were but
-a thing to be kicked about and broken,—all this shown
-again and again until the full dramatic force and
-beauty of the pictorial moment is impressed upon the
-spectator.</p>
-
-<p>This kind of repetition can be done much more
-effectively and with less danger of monotony in the
-photoplay than in the stage play, because much of
-the action which intervenes between the repetitions
-can be eliminated and other scenes can be cut in without
-breaking the continuity of visible motion, while on
-the stage no bridging of time or shifting of scene is
-feasible without dropping the curtain.</p>
-
-<p>One device which is unique on the screen is the
-repetition of the same “shot” by simply cutting into
-the film numerous prints from a single negative. A
-well-remembered case was the “Out-of-the-cradle
-endlessly-rocking” theme of Griffith’s “Intolerance,” a
-picture of a young woman rocking a cradle, which
-was repeated at frequent intervals throughout the
-story. The picture remained the same, but the context
-was ever new; and, if the repetition was not
-impressive to the spectators, the fault was not in the
-device itself, but rather in the fact that there really
-was no very clear connection between the cradle-rocking
-and intolerance.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">110</span></p>
-
-<p>Whenever we speak of emphasis in art we are
-naturally concerned about emphasizing that which is
-vital in the theme or story. We do not, for example,
-emphasize a man’s suspenders in a portrait where the
-main theme is grief. Nor need we, for that matter,
-emphasize tears; for a man might show as much grief
-with his shoulders as with a wet handkerchief. In
-other words, if the theme is grief we should emphasize
-grief itself rather than any particular gesture of
-grief.</p>
-
-<p>Similarly if in a romantic story the main theme is
-dashing sword play, it is swordsmanship which should
-be stressed, and not the sword itself, unless, of course,
-that sword happens to have some magic property.
-Therefore it is bad art in “The Mark of Zorro,” a
-Douglas Fairbanks play, to repeat with every sub-title
-a conventional sketch of a sword. It is bad, not
-only because the hero’s sword needs no emphasis, but
-because a mere decorative drawing of a sword cannot
-reinforce the significance of the real sword which the
-hero so gallantly wields.</p>
-
-<p>There is a recurring note, however, in this play
-which can be commended. It is the “Z” shaped mark
-or wound which Zorro makes with his sword. We
-see it first as an old scar on the cheek of a man whom
-Zorro has reprimanded. Then we see Zorro himself
-trace the mark on a bulletin board from which he
-tears down a notice. Then we see him cut the
-dreaded “Z” upon the neck of an antagonist. And,
-finally, we see him, some days later, fix his weird mark
-squarely on the brow of his old enemy. And in every
-case except the first we observe the quick zigzag motion
-of the avenging sword.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">111</span></p>
-
-<p>Here the emphasis lies in the repetition of a pictorial
-element with some variety of shape and movement
-and under a variety of circumstances. The
-“mark” of Zorro becomes a sharp symbol which
-inscribes ever anew upon our minds the character of
-the hero, his dashing pursuit and lightning retribution.</p>
-
-<p>Emphasis by repetition in the photoplay may further
-be achieved in ways which we shall not take the time
-to discuss. Thus an especially significant setting may
-be repeated in various lights and in combination with
-various actions; or some particular action, such as a
-dramatic dance, may be repeated in a variety of
-settings.</p>
-
-<p>A sure means of emphasis is contrast. We have
-already shown how this principle works in cases where
-a moving thing is contrasted with other things which
-are at rest. Yet the contrast in such cases works only
-in one direction. That is to say, the contrast throws
-the attention on the motion, but it does not at the
-same time draw any attention to the fixed objects.
-It will be interesting now to illustrate a sort of double-acting
-contrast which may produce great emphasis in
-pictures. In the well-known case where a tall man
-stands beside a short one on a stage the difference
-between them is emphasized by the contrast in their
-statures; and when we meet them off the stage we
-are surprised to discover that one is not so tall, and
-the other not so short, as we had been led to believe.
-In a photograph, for a similar reason, if a very black
-tone is placed sharply along a very white one, each
-tone will make the other seem more intense. And if
-a painter desires to emphasize a color, say red, in his
-painting he does not need to do so by spreading more<span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">112</span>
-paint over the first coat. Red may be accented by
-placing green beside it. In fact, each of these two
-colors can accent the other by contrast.</p>
-
-<p>Similarly when two motions occur together the contrast
-between them may be double-acting. When you
-are setting your watch, for example, the minute-hand
-seems to run faster, and the hour-hand more slowly,
-than is actually true, because of the contrast in their
-rates of speed. This simple law might well be applied
-in the movies when emphasis of motion is required.
-We would thus get the effect of speed upon the mind
-without the annoyance of speed for the eye.</p>
-
-<p>One does not have to be a critic to realize that there
-is entirely too much speed on the screen. Some of
-this dizzy swiftness is due to imperfect projection or
-to the worn-out condition of the film; witness the
-flicker and the “rain” of specks and lines. Much of
-it is due also to the fact that the projection is “speeded
-up” to a faster rate than that of the actual performance
-before the camera. But there is also a lamentable
-straining for effect by many directors who believe
-that an unnaturally fast tempo gives life and sparkle
-to the action. Perhaps some of these directors have
-not been able to forget a lesson learned during their
-stage experience. In the spoken drama it has long
-been a tradition that actors must speak more rapidly,
-and must pick up their cues more promptly, than
-people do in real life, in order that the play may not
-seem to drag. But we know that the motion picture
-is in danger of racing rather than dragging. And
-racing, as we have said, hurts the eyes.</p>
-
-<p>The principle of contrast can relieve the eye of a
-part of its work without imposing any additional task<span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">113</span>
-upon the mind. Thus some crazy Don Quixote may
-<em>seem</em> to cut and thrust with greater agility than the
-fighting which we actually <em>see</em>, provided his action is
-contrasted with the restful poking of his ham-fed servant,
-Sancho Panza. And thus a railroad train which
-really was running at a moderate speed, might <em>seem</em>
-to dash by on the screen, if it were contrasted with
-the ambling gait of a farmer’s team driven in the
-same direction along the tracks.</p>
-
-<p>A kind of emphasis which we may classify as contrast
-is that which occurs when movement is suddenly
-arrested. The unexpected stop not only makes
-the previous motion seem faster than it really was,
-but it also fixes attention more alertly on the thing
-which has just stopped moving. When you bump
-against a chair in the darkness you are always astonished
-to find that you were dashing along instead of
-merely walking slowly. But the shock has deceived
-you, for you really were walking slowly. If you are
-out hunting and your setter stops in his tracks, your
-eye is immediately upon him, and will remain so fixed
-until he or something else makes the next move. The
-same principle works on the screen. If an actor, or
-an animal, or a thing is in motion and then unexpectedly
-pauses, the effect of the pause is to attract immediate
-attention, as well as to make the previous motion
-seem to have been faster than it actually was. Sometimes
-this law may operate to distract our attention
-from the dramatic interest. If, for example, an outdoor
-scene has been “shot” on a squally day, and the
-wind has abruptly died down for a few moments
-during the climax of the scene, the effect on the screen
-will be to attract our attention instantly to the leaves<span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">114</span>
-which have stopped fluttering, or the garments which
-have stopped flapping. We will observe the sudden
-change in the weather and forget the state of the
-story.</p>
-
-<p>With this argument we ourselves shall pause, in
-order to summarize the principal ways in which pictorial
-motions, working singly or together, can produce
-the greatest impression on the spectator with the
-least expenditure of his mental energy. Here is the
-list: A thing in motion is normally more emphatic
-than anything at rest in the same picture. Of two
-motions the one which is the more surprising or fanciful
-gets the chief attention. Slowness or slightness
-may sometimes by contrast be more emphatic than
-great speed or volume. A moving spot or a line flowing
-along its own length has a tendency to carry
-attention along with, or even ahead of, itself in the
-direction of movement. Two or more movements
-along well-marked lines, whether converging or diverging,
-focus attention on the point which these lines
-have in common. Lines moving in circles away from
-a common center hold attention on that center. Repetition
-can work for emphasis without monotony, provided
-it be a repetition with variety of circumstances.
-Contrast between two simultaneous motions or between
-a motion and an abrupt rest may be double-acting,
-that is, may emphasize in both directions.</p>
-
-<p>Our discussion of motions at work in a picture has
-not been exhaustive. The list might easily be made
-three times as long as it is. But it is long enough to
-illustrate the evil which motions may do if they are
-turned wild on the screen, and the good which they
-may work if they are harnessed by a director who<span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">115</span>
-understands these fundamental principles of pictorial
-composition.</p>
-
-<p>However, all work and no play would make any
-picture dull, but that is a subject for another chapter.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_116" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">116</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">PICTORIAL MOTIONS AT PLAY</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">The</span> average matter-of-fact man thinks that artists
-concern themselves only with copying their subjects,
-and that their success as artists consists in copying
-correctly. He is satisfied with a painted portrait of
-his wife, provided it is a “speaking likeness,” and he
-craves no other magic of design and color. Such a
-man praises a photoplay if it presents a “rattling good
-story,” and expects no thrill from the cinema composer’s
-conjuring with shifting patterns and evanescent
-tones. At least he would say something to that
-effect if you argued the matter with him. But he
-would be mistaken in his self-analysis, for even a
-prosaic person really enjoys the decorative rhythmical
-quality in a picture, though he may not be conscious
-of doing so. And every spectator can get the richest
-beauty from the screen only when the pictorial motions
-play as well as they work.</p>
-
-<p>What is the difference between play and work? We
-know that when our work most resembles play it is
-most enjoyable. And we know, too, that play, even
-when it has not been professionalized, often comes
-very near being work. The playing of children, as
-that of grown-ups, is often very highly organized and
-pursued with a great deal of effort and earnestness.
-Play, however, may be characterized by spontaneity<span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">117</span>
-and variety. It is not forced, like work, which aims
-for some definite practical result; and it does not have
-the rigidity and uniformity which in work sometimes
-develops into dullness. If the emphasizing of dramatic
-expression may be called the work of pictorial
-motions, then the spontaneity and variety which accompanies
-this work may be called the play of pictorial
-motions. And that play is essentially the same as
-rhythm.</p>
-
-<p>We think immediately of two of the elder arts in
-which rhythm is all important—dancing and music.
-Music leads us to the thought of song, and poetry,
-and oratory, arts which also are dependent on rhythm.
-Dancing suggests sculpture, and sculpture suggests
-painting, arts which would have little beauty without
-the quality of rhythm. Even architecture must have
-it. From art we turn to nature, and we see the poignant
-beauty of rhythm in cloud and wave, in tree and
-flower, in brook and mountain, in bird and beast. The
-motion picture, which is the mirror of nature, and
-at the same time the tablet upon which all of the
-elder arts may write their laws, must bring to us
-the inheritance and reflection of rhythm.</p>
-
-<p>This quality has already been discussed in connection
-with the laws of the eye, in Chapter III, and in
-connection with static composition, in Chapter V. We
-come now to the pictorial problem of weaving the
-individual and combined motions of a photoplay into a
-totality of rhythm. First, let us consider the case of
-a single moving spot. Suppose that we have before
-us a barren hillside of Mexico, an expanse of light
-gray on the screen. Down that hillside a horseman is
-to come, dark against the gray. If he rides in a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">118</span>
-single straight line, directly toward the camera or
-obliquely down the hill, his movement will not be
-pleasing to the eye, nor will it seem natural. But if
-he moves in a waving line, a series of reverse curves
-freely made, the effect on the eye of the spectator will
-be somewhat like that of the “line of beauty” discussed
-in Chapter V.</p>
-
-<p>An important difference, however, between a fixed
-line and one traced by a moving object is that the
-latter disappears as soon as it is drawn. It may linger
-in our memories, to be sure, yet our eyes can trace
-that line only once, and only in the direction taken by
-the moving object. That is, our physical eye cannot
-range back and forth over the vanished path, as it
-can over a fixed line. And a still greater difference
-is that the moving object has a rhythm of velocity as
-well as a rhythm of direction. Velocity and direction
-of movement arise and exist together, and consequently
-their relation to each other may produce a
-new rhythm. The horse, varying his pace according
-to the nature of the ground, may gallop along the
-level stretches, and may pick his way cautiously down
-the steep declines. There is natural harmony in
-rapid motion over a long smooth line, and slow motion
-over a short jagged one. A simple case like this may
-help us to answer the question, When is the relation
-between velocity and direction harmonious? But we
-have still the fundamental questions, When is a change
-of direction rhythmical? And, when is a change of
-velocity rhythmical?</p>
-
-<p>We cannot promise to give direct and definite answers
-to these questions; but, recalling our discussion
-in Chapter V concerning rhythm in fixed design, let<span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">119</span>
-us say that cinematic rhythm is a peculiar alternation
-of phases or properties of pictorial motion which
-gives the spectator a vivid sense of movement performed
-with ease and variety.</p>
-
-<p>Now it may seem a vain task to analyze or try to
-define so delicate a thing as rhythm, because all of
-us can be carried away by rhythm without saddling
-it with a formula. Yet analysis will serve a useful
-purpose if it can help the director to avoid motions
-which are not rhythmical and if it can help the thoughtful
-spectator to fix the blame for the jumble of unrhythmical
-motions which he now so often sees on the
-screen.</p>
-
-<p>Suppose we make a few tests upon the horseman
-coming down the hillside. If he moves in a perfectly
-straight line at a perfectly steady pace, the action will
-seem to be a forced, hard effort exerted without
-variety. No rhythm will be there. But if he moves,
-even without change of pace, along a path of flowing
-curves, we will sense a rhythm of direction, providing
-the horse seems to follow the winding path freely
-and without undue effort.</p>
-
-<p>If, without change of direction, the horse frequently
-alters his gait from a gallop to a walk and back to a
-gallop again in equal periods of time, say half a
-minute each, it will be apparent that ease and variety
-are utterly absent from the movement. And even if
-the horse follows a winding path and changes gait
-at such regular intervals the rhythm in direction will
-be neutralized by the lack of rhythm in velocity. If,
-however, there is a progression of varying directions,
-varying gaits, and varying durations of time which
-appear to be spontaneously and easily performed, a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">120</span>
-progression, moreover, in which both the similarities
-and the differences of the various phases can instantly
-be perceived by the spectator, he will immediately
-experience the emotion of rhythmical movement.</p>
-
-<p>The above example illustrates how a single spot can
-move rhythmically over the area of a picture. A
-moving line, say a column of soldiers on the march,
-may have still more rhythm. We get a hint of this
-from the “still,” facing <a href="#Page_133">page 133</a>. It represents a
-scene from the Metro production of Ibanez’s “Four
-Horsemen of the Apocalypse,” which was directed by
-Rex Ingram. We see there that the soldiers describe
-a path of alternate curves, instead of the straight lines
-and square corners which a less imaginative director
-would have ordered. Mr. Ingram has further heightened
-the rhythm by placing gaps here and there in the
-main column, and by introducing a secondary movement
-in the detachment which turns off from the road
-just before reaching the village. These movements
-are truly pictorial in composition; yet their meaning
-is none the less military and dramatic.</p>
-
-<p>In the scene just described the various motions are
-similar, and the handling of them is therefore comparatively
-easy. But it is very difficult to make a
-rhythmical combination of motions which differ
-widely in character. In “The Dumb Girl of Portici,”
-for instance, we are shown Pavlowa dancing on the
-beach, while the stately waves and pounding surf of
-the ocean fill most of the area of the screen. But
-there is no rhythm in the combined movements of that
-picture. The dancer without the sea, or the sea without
-the dancer, might have been perfectly rhythmical.
-But when we try to view them together in this photoplay<span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">121</span>
-we get only the strong clash between their movements,
-and we feel no pleasure when shifting our
-gaze from one to the other.</p>
-
-<p>Perhaps the picture might have been a success if
-the dancer’s ground had been a bank sufficiently high
-to mask the severe effect of the surf, yet permitting a
-view of the incoming waves, and if the stately variety
-in the movement of the sea had been taken as a key
-to a sympathetic movement of the dancer. We might
-then get a harmonious, alternating flow of the two
-movements, our eyes might play easily from one to
-the other, and the total pictorial effect might arouse
-the emotion of rhythm.</p>
-
-<p>In a similar way any of the movements of nature,
-such as the effect of wind on cloud, or tree, or field
-of grain; the fall or flow of water; the flight of bird
-or characteristic movement of beast, movements which,
-once admitted to the scene, cannot easily be controlled,
-might be taken as keys in which to play those movements
-which can be controlled.</p>
-
-<p>Some practical-minded person may suggest that
-instead of worrying about the composition of “unnecessary”
-motions, it would be better to omit them. But
-such a person overlooks the natural human desire for
-richness in art. We are so constituted that we crave
-lively emotional activity. We love rich variety, and
-at the same time we enjoy our ease. When we listen
-to the music of a pianist we are not satisfied if he
-plays with only one finger, even though he might thus
-play the melody correctly, because the melody alone
-is not rich enough. We want that melody against all
-its background of music. We want those musical
-sounds so beautifully related to each other that their<span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">122</span>
-harmony may arouse our feelings without unduly
-straining our attention.</p>
-
-<p>A splendid example of secondary motion may be
-seen in the light draperies of a dancer. Even in the
-elementary movement of a few leaps across the stage
-we see the delicate rhythm of a scarf which is at first
-retarded by the air, then follows the dancer gracefully,
-and at last gently overtakes her.</p>
-
-<p>Between the movements of body and scarf there
-is a charming play. They are pleasantly similar, yet
-they are pleasantly different. And there is a distinct
-feeling of progression in the various phases of this
-similarity and this difference. As spectators we catch
-this progression without any effort of the intellect
-and are instantly swept into its rhythm.</p>
-
-<p>It would be easy for the director, of course, if the
-story which he is about to film always called for action
-as graceful as that of a dance. But unfortunately his
-scenario often demands the connecting of actions
-which, pictorially considered, are totally unrelated to
-each other. Yet if the director cares to seek the principles
-of beauty he will find many ways of harmonizing
-elements that are seemingly in conflict.</p>
-
-<p>One way is simply to impose on each of the discordant
-elements a new value which they may assume in
-common without losing their own distinctive characters.
-Suppose, for instance, that we must show a
-society lady, with all her soft refinement, on a visit
-to a foundry, with all its sweating roughness. One
-may fear that there must be something repellent
-between her stately gentility and the bending backs
-of workmen; between her kid-gloved gestures and the
-flow of molten metal. Yet we can blend the whole<span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">123</span>
-scene into a single rhythm by suffusing all its elements
-with the warm glow of the furnace and by
-playing over them all the same movement of quivering
-light and shadow. This vibrant, welding beauty
-which lady and laborer and machine may have in common,
-while still retaining their individual dramatic
-significance, will thus give the touch of art to a motion
-picture which might otherwise be merely a crude
-photographic record of an incident in a story.</p>
-
-<p>Another way of bringing two conflicting motions
-into a rhythmical relation is to place between them a
-third motion which, by being somewhat like either of
-the other two, bridges the gap and thus transforms a
-sense of fixed opposition into a sense of moving variety.
-It would be somewhat of a shock, for instance,
-to shift our view instantly from the rippling flow of
-a narrow stream to the wheels and levers of a mill.
-But there would undoubtedly be a sense of continuity,
-and perhaps of rhythm, in shifting from a general
-view of the stream to a view of the water-wheel over
-which it flows, and thence to the wheels of the machinery
-inside the mill.</p>
-
-<p>This method of interposing a harmonizer might
-be useful also in carrying over the rhythm of motion
-into the rhythm of fixed forms. Thus if we were to
-throw upon the screen a picture of the gently rolling
-sea, sharply followed by a view of the sweeping horizon
-of the hills, it is most probable that the two kinds
-of rhythm would not unite to draw a single emotional
-response from the spectator. He would feel only the
-contrast. But if the view of the sea were followed
-by a view of a field of grain, whose wind-driven billows
-resembled the waves of the sea and whose rolling<span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">124</span>
-ground resembled the sweep of the hills, then the
-rhythm of the quiet hills themselves might easily
-seem to be one with the rhythm of the restless sea.</p>
-
-<p>As we study the subject of visual rhythm we are
-led to compare it again and again with auditive rhythm,
-which is best exemplified in music. Thus it is easy
-to see how a given motion in a picture might be considered
-the melody while all the other motions serve
-as accompaniment, and how characteristic motions
-might be played against each other like counterpoint
-in music. It is easy to see how a whole succession
-of scenes might be considered a single rhythmical
-totality, like a “movement” in a musical composition.
-And it is certain that any director who thought of
-cinema composition in that sense would never permit
-the slovenly joining which is so familiar in photoplays.
-He would not then allow the shift from one scene
-to another to be essentially a clash of unrelated
-motions. He would assure himself rather that the
-characteristic types of motion in one scene, their
-directions, velocities, and patterns, played into corresponding
-factors of the next scene, until the entire
-succession became a symphony of motion.<a id="FNanchor_4" href="#Footnote_4" class="fnanchor">D</a></p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-
-<p><a id="Footnote_4" href="#FNanchor_4" class="fnanchor">D</a> For a further comparison between music and pictorial
-motions see Chapter IV of “The Art of Photoplay Making.”</p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>It is an interesting fact that movement in a photoplay
-may come from other things besides motions.
-One would get a sense of movement, for example,
-even if every scene in a photoplay were itself a
-fixed picture held for a few seconds on the screen.
-The various durations of these pictures might be in
-a rhythmical series. The same might be said of their
-dominant tones, and of their characteristic patterns<span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">125</span>
-and textures. Would the time-lengths 3, 4, 2, 7, 5,
-be a good succession? Or would 3, 7, 4, 5, 2 be
-better? Which would make a better succession of
-figures? A circle, a triangle, and a cross? Or a
-cross, a square, and a circle? Questions like these
-are not trivial; neither are they over-refined. They
-and their answers should appear in the catechism of
-every cinema composer.</p>
-
-<p>Speaking of durations of scenes reminds us that
-in music it is often the silences between the notes
-which vary in length while the notes themselves are
-uniform. This would be true in the case of a simple
-melody played on the piano. The intervals between
-notes can be observed by tapping out the “time” of
-the piece on a single key of the piano, or on a tin
-pan, for that matter; and the rhythm of time thus
-represented would alone enable a listener to identify
-any popular piece of music.</p>
-
-<p>At present there are no rests on the screen, no
-blank periods between the scenes. There are, to be
-sure, moments of relaxation when scenes are being
-“faded out,” and these “fades,” like the dying away
-of musical sounds, have genuine rhythmical movement.
-But there is not on the screen any alternation
-between stimulus and non-stimulus, as there is in music,
-and as there is also in the performance of a stage play.
-The motion picture, therefore, lacks that source of
-rhythm which exists in musical rests or in the dramatic
-pauses of stage dialogue.</p>
-
-<p>Whether intervals of non-stimulus could be successfully
-introduced on the screen can be learned only
-by experiment. Any director who is really in earnest
-about developing the motion picture as art should<span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">126</span>
-make such an experiment. If he investigates the
-results of scientific tests in psychological laboratories
-he will learn that under certain conditions the normal
-spectator unconsciously creates rhythm in what he
-sees. It has been shown, for example, that a person
-looking at a small light which is flashed on and off at
-intervals has a tendency to make rhythmic groupings
-of those flashes, by overestimating or underestimating
-the lengths of the intervals. In other words, if you
-give the beholder’s imagination a chance to function,
-it will indulge in rhythmic play. We believe that if
-a cinema composer could thus produce rhythm by
-illusion, as well as by actual presentation, his achievement
-would be epoch-making in the movies.</p>
-
-<p>Movement, movement through rich variety, movement
-accomplished with the utmost ease—that is the
-essence of what we have chosen to call the play of
-pictorial motions. That play, as we have seen in the
-illustrations given, involves every kind of pictorial
-motion, whether of spot, or line, or pattern, or texture,
-or tone; and every property or phase, whether
-of direction, or rate, or duration; and every circumstance,
-whether in relation to other motions near or
-remote, simultaneous, or successive, or in relation to
-fixed elements of the picture. Any two or three of
-these things may be treated as a separate problem,
-but it is in the orchestration of all of them together
-that the director may achieve the dominant, distinctive
-rhythm of his photoplay. If he does not aspire to
-such achievement he is unworthy of his profession.
-If he evades his problems because they are difficult
-he is robbing his trust. If he declares that the world
-that loves movies does not crave beauty on the screen,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">127</span>
-he is bearing false witness. If he believes that the
-beauty of a photoplay lies wholly in the emotional
-appeal of the performer and in the dramatic action
-of the plot, he is stone blind to art.</p>
-
-<p>So far as the motions in a picture present the actions
-and reactions of the dramatic characters clearly and
-emphatically, they do faithful work; but this work
-becomes play when it is relieved of its hardness and
-dullness, and is animated with a spontaneity and variety
-that catches up the spectator into a swinging
-movement of attention. And those motions which
-are both work and play are basic in the beauty of
-cinematic art.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_128" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_128">128</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">PICTORIAL MOTIONS AT REST</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">That</span> a moving thing may sometimes seem to be at
-rest is well known by any one who has ever spun a
-top. The top spins itself to sleep. We gaze upon it in
-a peculiar spell of restfulness, which is broken only
-when the top wakes up and begins to wabble.</p>
-
-<p>Now one trouble with the movies is that they often
-wabble when they ought to spin. The motions in the
-picture too often lack a center of balance, a point of
-rest. All of us have been annoyed by excessive
-motions, jumbling, clashing, on the screen. But many
-of us have also, in lucky moments, been delighted by
-sudden harmonies on the screen, when the pictorial
-motions, without slowing up in the least, were conjured
-into a strange vital repose. And afterward,
-when we recalled the enthrallment of such moments,
-we became optimists about the future of cinema art.</p>
-
-<p>Surely this is one of the characteristic appealing
-things about a motion picture, that it can show us
-motions doing the work of pictorial expression, indulging
-in rhythmic play, and yet suggesting a dynamic
-repose. Thus the youngest art can give us in a
-new way that “stimulation and repose” which, psychologists
-say, is the function of all arts. The painter
-who can suggest movement by means of fixed lines,
-masses, and colors is no more of a magician than the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_129">129</span>
-cinema composer who can make moving things suggest
-rest.</p>
-
-<p>Let me propose the following as working theories
-to explain the effect of reposefulness in organized pictorial
-motions: First, that the separate motions are
-balanced against each other; Second, that the significant
-motions are kept near to a center of rest within
-the frame of the picture, are sometimes even limited
-to an exceedingly small area of the screen; and, Third,
-that every significant motion is harmonized in kind,
-direction, and tempo with everything else in the
-picture.</p>
-
-<p>The balancing of pictorial motions does not imply
-that they must be paired off in exact equals. Certainly
-we do not insist that a dramatic scene be so
-composed that when, for example, a person rises from
-a chair in one part of a room, some other person sits
-down in a chair in the opposite part of the room. Such
-an effect would be highly mechanical, like the teetering
-of a see-saw; and it is not possible for a spectator
-to get a thrill of beauty while his attention is being
-held down to mechanics. We mean rather to apply
-the same reasoning to pictorial motions which we have
-in Chapter V applied to fixed lines, shapes, and tones.
-In short, we want to see the values of pictorial motions
-so well distributed over the screen, and so related to
-each other, that they give the impression of being in
-perfect equilibrium.</p>
-
-<p>Suppose we imagine a cinema scene which contains
-a waterfall in the left half, and nothing in the right
-half except a dark, uninteresting side of a cliff. That
-composition would be out of balance. And if a band
-of Indians entered the scene from the left and did a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_130">130</span>
-war dance directly in front of the waterfall, that
-would throw the composition still more out of balance.
-Or if, at the opening of the scene, the Indians appeared
-dancing in front of the bare cliff, and then gradually
-moved over to a place in front of the waterfall, this
-cluttering of motions would certainly unbalance the
-picture.</p>
-
-<p>Such cluttering is common on the screen because of
-the many movie directors who either are afraid of
-simplicity, or lack the skill which is necessary to make
-complexity appear simple. In the scene just mentioned
-the safest course would be to leave out the
-waterfall, however much of a natural wonder it may
-be, and to let the bare cliff serve as the entire background
-for the Indian dance. But if this cannot be
-done because of the peculiar demands of the plot,
-then the picture might be balanced by introducing
-some additional motion in the right half, say a column
-of smoke rising from a camp fire. Thus even the
-careful addition of a new element would tend to bring
-unity and restfulness into the arrangement of parts.
-Just visualize that composition, the whitish water falling
-on one side, and the light gray smoke rising on
-the other, and you will feel a peculiar restful balance
-which could never be obtained by a mechanical pairing
-of two waterfalls or two columns of smoke.</p>
-
-<p>As critics searching for beauty on the screen, we
-might even carry our demand for pictorial balance
-still farther. In some other picture we might demand
-that there be motions in the upper part of the composition
-to balance those in the lower part. To be
-sure, we would hardly look for such balance in a
-stage play, or in an ordinary cinema scene where the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_131">131</span>
-camera “shoots” in a level line, because in ordinary
-every-day life we see more motion near the bottom
-of our view than anywhere in the upper levels. Besides
-it is natural that weights should be kept low; any
-object is more likely to be in equilibrium when its
-center of gravity is low. But when we are shown a
-motion picture which has been made with the camera
-pointing downward, so that a level thing, like a plain
-or the surface of the sea, appears standing on end,
-then we like to see the points of interest so distributed
-that the various parts of the screen seem to be proportionally
-filled. Thus in a motion picture of a lake
-taken from a high cliff we are not pleased to see moving
-objects, boats, swans, etc., only in that area of the
-picture which comes near the lower edge of the frame.
-We realize instantly that the objects are not actually
-above or below each other in the air. And we forget,
-therefore, that the screen is really in a vertical plane
-and think of it rather as we would of a map lying
-before us. In fact, if there are swans in the near part
-of the lake view, then the distant surface of the lake
-will not appear to sink back into its proper level unless
-it bears some balancing weight and value, say, two or
-three small boats under sail.</p>
-
-<p>However, even the best of balancing in a separate
-scene cannot insure a balance between that scene and
-the next one. Directors are often tempted to make shots
-from odd angles, straight up or straight down, and
-to scatter them through a film, showing, for example,
-a skyscraper lying down, or a city street standing on
-end. But the resulting series of scenes does not make
-a composition pleasing to the eye. It gives the effect
-of wabbling. Even if these oblique views show no<span class="pagenum" id="Page_132">132</span>
-moving things whatsoever, their combined effect is
-the opposite of restfulness.</p>
-
-<p>Returning now to the subject of balance in separate
-scenes, we may consider depth, the third dimension
-of a cinema subject. This dimension is usually far
-greater than either the height or the breadth of that
-space which the camera measures off for us. And
-it is interesting to see what problems the cinema composer
-has in relating motions in the third dimension
-to those in the other dimensions of the picture. He
-often finds it hard, for instance, to compensate in the
-background for the movements in the foreground,
-without destroying the dramatic emphasis. The usual
-trouble in the movies is that, when the dramatic interest
-is in the foreground, the motions in the background
-nevertheless draw so much of our attention
-to that region that the picture becomes too heavy in
-the rear; while, on the other hand, if the dramatic
-interest is in the background, the motions in the foreground
-nevertheless become so heavy that the front
-of the picture falls into our faces.</p>
-
-<p>These are common faults; yet they may be avoided
-by foresight and ingenuity. In the “Four Horsemen
-of the Apocalypse,” Rex Ingram reveals a sure sense
-of proportion in his control of the marching soldiers.
-If you turn to the “still” of a village scene from this
-photoplay, facing <a href="#Page_133">page 133</a>, you will get a suggestion
-of the equilibrium which is obtained for a time, at
-least, between the motions in various regions of the
-picture.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_133" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 34em;">
- <img src="images/i_133.jpg" width="2151" height="1657" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>The Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse</i>. The arrangement in this scene has
-interesting balance between the right and left halves of the picture, as well as between
-the foreground and the background, and there is a vigorous rhythm in the moving
-columns of soldiers. See <a href="#Page_120">pages 120</a> and <a href="#Page_132">132</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>Let us say that the foreground of that scene extends
-from the camera to the cavalryman, that the middle
-ground is that area which is occupied by the buildings,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_133">133</span>
-and that the background is all the region which
-lies beyond the ruined tower. This picture has many
-distances, and yet they fuse together into a single
-composition. Equilibrium is maintained by the fact
-that the scattering figures near the fountain weigh
-against the marching soldiers to the left in the foreground,
-while the two sides find a center of balance
-in the quiet horseman and the three persons to whom
-he is talking. In the middle ground the same care
-has been shown, for the soldiers first swing to their
-left, past the tower, and then execute a balancing
-movement to their right. In the background there is
-a balance between those forces which are executing a
-“column right” and those which are proceeding down
-into the village street. And if we take the background
-of the picture as against the foreground, we shall
-find a balancing point in the narrowest part of the
-street. No undue attention is attracted to either side
-of this point, but the whole sweep of interest from
-front to back, or from back to front, is continuous and
-even. There is plenty of military movement here amid
-evidences of terrific bombardment, and yet, because
-of the artistic composition of the picture, we get from
-it all a momentary sense of repose, as though war
-itself were at rest.</p>
-
-<p>Several details in this “still” are worth noting. For
-example, the comparatively few figures in the right
-side of the foreground are given additional weight by
-the whiteness of costume, as against the gray of the
-soldiers. Another interesting thing is the balance
-between the line described by the leading company of
-soldiers and the line of tree tops on the wooded hill,
-which begins near the upper right hand corner and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_134">134</span>
-extends to the castle. This relation can be clearly
-seen by holding the “still” upside down.</p>
-
-<p>The reader must keep in mind, of course, that in a
-“still” the arrested motion has not the same weight
-as the actual motion on the screen, and consequently
-the fixed things get more than their share of weight.
-Therefore in this “still” from “The Four Horsemen”
-the jagged holes in the buildings attract more attention
-than they do on the screen, where the movement of the
-soldiers and civilians brings the whole composition
-into balance.</p>
-
-<p>When the whole picture is deep, as in the example
-just discussed, it offends us if some of the moving
-objects come near the camera, because this produces
-two pictures within a single frame, namely, a close-up
-and a long shot. The effect is as bad as that of listening
-to an orchestra so placed that some of the instruments
-are five feet away from our ears while the others
-are seventy-five feet away. In either case there comes
-a sense of violence instead of restfulness. The close-up
-superposed on the long shot is a common fault in
-photoplays. But we are often annoyed by the opposite
-fault also, that of jumbling two sets of actions which
-are going on in adjoining areas, one just beyond the
-other. In such a case the director should contrive to
-make the vertical planes seem farther apart than they
-really are; and it can easily be done without cleaving
-the picture in two.</p>
-
-<p>To prove this let us imagine a cabaret scene containing
-prominent persons of the play sitting at tables
-near the camera, and a number of couples dancing on
-a floor farther away. In such an arrangement it is
-probable that the diners have more dramatic value<span class="pagenum" id="Page_135">135</span>
-than the dancers; yet the dancing figures are likely to
-distract attention from those seated at the tables, and
-thus throw the picture out of balance. Mr. Ingram in
-“The Four Horsemen” had this very problem, and he
-solved it in a very simple and convincing way. He
-allowed a thick haze of cigarette smoke to envelop
-the dancers till they seemed dim and distant. Or,
-rather, he used the smoke as a transparent curtain
-which separates the diners from the action in the
-background. Thus balance was restored and the spectator
-could follow the action in the foreground without
-a sense of disturbance.</p>
-
-<p>A separation of planes somewhat similar to this was
-skilfully effected by Allan Dwan in “Sahara.” One
-of the settings is a luxurious tent in the desert. The
-front of this tent had a wide opening over which hung
-a veil of mosquito netting. Viewed from within the
-tent, this veil became a soft background against which
-the figures moved, while at the same time it served as
-a thick atmosphere to give dimness and distance to the
-figures which were just outside the tent. By this
-device, which is as natural and unobtrusive as the
-smoke screen described above, Mr. Dwan, besides providing
-a peculiar pictorial quality of gradated tones,
-kept two sets of figures separate and yet combined
-them in rich restfulness.</p>
-
-<p>When a director is composing a scene in which there
-is a single moving element with a very short path of
-motion and no strong fixed interests to counter-balance
-it, he should remember that an object tends to
-shift the weight of interest somewhat in advance of
-its own movement. Therefore, a picture will seem to
-be in better balance if a movement begins near one<span class="pagenum" id="Page_136">136</span>
-edge and ends near the center, than if it begins at the
-center of the picture and passes out at one side.</p>
-
-<p>This observation regarding the shifting of balance
-during pictorial action raises the question whether it
-is a practical possibility to keep the composition of a
-cinema scene steadily in equilibrium for minute after
-minute. Since the fixed accents do not change their
-positions and the moving accents do, one might suppose
-that the scene must sooner or later fall out of
-balance. But this is not necessarily so. It is true that
-if, for example, there is a group of fixed accents in
-the left half of the picture, and a single figure starts
-from the center and passes out of the scene at the
-right, it would tend, first, to over-balance the right
-side of the picture, and then suddenly to leave it without
-weight. But this tendency may be counter-acted
-by swinging the camera slightly to the left without
-stopping the exposure. Such an expedient would shift
-all of the fixed accents together, though at the cost of
-introducing a momentary false motion. The ingenious
-director may find other means by which to compensate
-for the changes which must of necessity come
-about in a cinematic composition. However, when it
-is not possible to have good proportion and balance
-at more than one moment of a changing scene, that
-moment should be at the pictorial climax, the crucial
-point of that scene, the instant when the spectator is
-to receive the strongest impression, the greatest stimulation
-and yet the most perfect repose.</p>
-
-<p>Equilibrium is reposeful because it is characteristic
-of a thing at rest. To say that another characteristic
-of a thing at rest is that it stays where it is, may sound
-like an Irish bull; but we say it, nevertheless, in order<span class="pagenum" id="Page_137">137</span>
-to make another point in our argument that pictorial
-motions may sometimes be in dynamic repose. It is
-quite possible for a pictorial motion to give a sharp
-impression of power, weight, and velocity, and yet
-stay practically where it first appears on the screen.
-An express train, for example, may be shown in a
-“long shot” starting several hundred yards away from
-the camera and continuing for miles into the distance,
-and yet the actual moving image on the screen might
-cover an area less than two feet square, and might,
-from beginning to end of the scene, never come near
-the frame of the picture. Thus the train, without
-losing any of its impressive character, would provide
-a reposeful motion for the eye to gaze upon. Surely
-such an effect would be better than to show the train
-as a close-up on a track at right angles to our line of
-sight, with the locomotive crashing in through the
-frame at the left of the picture and crashing out
-through the frame at the right.</p>
-
-<p>The reposeful quality of restricted movement on
-the screen is due partly to the fact that the flicker and
-the eye movement is thus reduced, as we have said in
-Chapter III. In the case just described it is due also
-to the contrast between the slight movement which we
-actually <em>look at</em> and the large movement which we
-really <em>perceive and feel</em>. We look at inches and perceive
-miles. Thus we see very much with extreme
-ease.</p>
-
-<p>We have remarked in preceding chapters that every
-picture has four lines, those of the frame, which the
-composer must always consider. He could, it is true,
-soften the sharp boundaries of the picture by using
-some masking device with the camera, but this is not<span class="pagenum" id="Page_138">138</span>
-usually done. The four corners of the frame are
-always strongly emphasized, because of the crossing of
-lines at right angles. To lead another strong line into
-one of the corners would surely result in undue emphasis
-and lack of balance, because of the power of
-converging lines. It is almost as bad to lead a strong
-line squarely into the frame between the corners,
-because such a meeting creates two more right angles
-to attract attention. Of course, there may be certain
-lines in a composition, such as the line of the horizon,
-which cannot stop short of the frame. In such a case
-it is well to have some other strong accent not far
-from the center of the picture in order to keep the
-attention of the beholder within the frame.</p>
-
-<p>What is true of the relation between fixed lines is
-also true of the relation between paths of motion and
-fixed lines. It is rather annoying to watch a continuous
-movement continually being cut off by the frame;
-and it is especially annoying when one sees that such
-a composition might have been avoided. In a waterfall,
-for example, the points of greatest interest are the
-curving top and the foaming bottom, and we like to
-see both at the same time and wholly within the frame.
-A motion shown entirely surrounded by things at rest
-is reposeful on the screen as well as in nature. Like
-a fixed object it stays where it is.</p>
-
-<p>There are certain pictorial motions, however, such
-as the falling of snow, which must always either begin
-or continue outside of the frame. But even when
-we view such a motion on the screen or in nature we
-get a feeling of repose, because our eyes do not perform
-any following movement; we do not, in watching
-a snow storm through a window, pick out certain<span class="pagenum" id="Page_139">139</span>
-flakes and follow them from a height until they
-strike the ground; but rather we keep our line of sight
-steady upon a certain spot while the changing texture
-slips by. One can get the same effect by looking down
-from a tall building into a crowded street. The individuals
-are no longer thought of as separate moving
-objects, because they weave themselves into a broad
-band of moving and changing texture. Here we get
-the feeling of restfulness, of motion in repose, in contrast
-to the feeling of restless motion when we ourselves
-become part of that crowd.</p>
-
-<p>A delightful picture in “Barbary Sheep,” directed
-by Maurice Tourneur, is the view of a flock of sheep
-moving slowly along from left to right. The animals
-are so crowded together that the mass as a whole has
-a textural quality. And yet it is not fixed texture, like
-that of cloth, because some of the sheep move faster
-and then again more slowly than the others, and thus,
-as in the case of the snow flakes, or the crowd in the
-street, give us a vital stimulus of change within the
-texture itself.</p>
-
-<p>A somewhat similar sense of rest comes from watching
-those motions which arise and vanish within some
-given area of the screen. A cloud of cigarette smoke
-which floats and coils for a few moments and then
-fades into nothing, bubbles which rise in a pool and
-break into faint ripples that finally die on the glassy
-surface, the blazing and dimming of tones through
-the photographic device of the “fade-out” and the
-“fade-in”—all changes of this type we sense vividly
-as movements, and yet as movements in delightful
-repose.</p>
-
-<p>At the beginning of this chapter we mentioned the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_140">140</span>
-spinning top as an example of motion that had the
-appearance of being at rest. To a certain extent all
-circular movement presents that appearance and may
-be very pleasing on the screen, providing it does not
-conflict with our desire for fitness and is not allowed
-to become monotonous. A fly wheel whirling may
-look like a disk at rest, but it is monotonous and
-entirely without artistic stimulation. The action
-within the ring of a circus presents a more stimulating
-show, and yet it is not quite satisfying as an
-artistic composition of motion, because we cannot help
-feeling that it is not natural, that it is unfit for a
-horse to turn forever within a forty-foot ring. In
-the æsthetic dance, on the other hand, a circling movement
-can always be of satisfying beauty, full of graceful
-vitality and yet delightfully reposeful, too, because
-it never flies away from its axis fixed within our area
-of vision.</p>
-
-<p>Now, we cannot recommend that the players of a
-film story should always be shown running around in
-circles. And yet their separate actions, gestures and
-bodily movements in general, may often be so composed
-that they progress in a circular path, each movement
-tracing an arc of a circle which nowhere touches
-the frame of the picture. Such circularity of motions
-would give unity, balance, and repose. A good example
-of circularity may be seen in “The Covered Wagon”
-when the wagon train, just before coming to a halt,
-divides and swings into two large arcs of a circle,
-which slowly contract as the wagons turn inward
-toward a common center.</p>
-
-<p>Another interesting example of circular balance
-may be seen in “One Arabian Night,” a German photoplay<span class="pagenum" id="Page_141">141</span>
-directed by Ernst Lubitsch. The scene is a
-court yard, viewed from on high. Looking down we
-see eight or ten servants running inward from all
-sides to a focal place, where they pile up cushions
-for the hero and heroine. Then they turn and run
-outwards to get more cushions. In a few moments
-they return, and finally they seat themselves in a circle
-about the central figures. Here is a charming combination
-of pictorial motion with a natural dramatic
-by-play, delighting the eye and lingering long as a
-pleasant motor image in memory. When we analyze
-this part of the picture we discover that the principle
-of balancing motions has been applied perfectly. To
-begin with, the design is kept in balance because the
-men enter at the same time from opposite directions
-and approach the center at equal speed. Thus, while
-they are separate figures moving over symmetrically
-arranged courses, they also form a circle which gradually
-contracts about a fixed center. This inward movement
-of the men is itself balanced by the corresponding
-outward movement when they go to get more
-cushions, which is in turn balanced when they come
-back. Finally this pattern of a circle contracting,
-expanding, and contracting again, harmonizes perfectly
-with the fixed circle which is formed when the
-men seat themselves. There is a further pleasing continuity
-in the composition when a woman enters the
-scene and dances over a circular path just within the
-ring formed by the servants.</p>
-
-<p>To the so-called practical business man, whose artistic
-experience consists chiefly in drawing dollar signs,
-it may sound like sheer folly for us spectators to ask
-a director to spend valuable time in refining the art<span class="pagenum" id="Page_142">142</span>
-of pictorial motions by some of the methods above
-suggested. The money magnate may not realize that
-even a slight improvement, a delicate touch, may be
-as important in a picture as in the motor of his touring
-car. Yet he does know, of course, that in the
-world of industry the superiority of one article over
-another may lie in a secret known only to the maker,
-a secret perhaps never even suspected by the man who
-sells the article. We should be sorry indeed to lose
-credit with the man who can draw dollar signs, because
-we need his co-operation, and we hope, therefore, that
-he will not long remain blind to the fact that in art
-the superiority of one article over another may lie in
-a concealed design so skilfully wrought that neither
-the spectator nor the man who traffics in the spectator’s
-pleasure may suspect its presence.</p>
-
-<p>Balanced motions and motions that are limited in
-area are valuable on the screen, we have said, because
-they can stimulate the spectator while giving him the
-satisfaction of repose. We come now to a third characteristic
-of motions that appear to be at rest, the
-fact that they are in perfect adjustment with everything
-else around them. Perfect adjustment means that
-all of the moving elements of a pictorial composition
-are at peace with the fixed elements, as well as with
-each other. It means harmony, the supreme quality
-of every art.</p>
-
-<p>No other art, not even music, contains so great a
-number of varied parts as the motion picture. To fuse
-all of these parts into a single harmonious whole
-requires knowledge and skill and happy inspiration,
-yet fusion must take place in the cinema composition
-itself in order that the spectator may be spared the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_143">143</span>
-annoyance of trying to unify in his own mind the ill-adjusted
-factors on the screen.</p>
-
-<p>The pleasing effect of motions in harmony can be
-illustrated by something with which we are all familiar
-from childhood, the display of sky rockets. The
-spray of stars, flaming up, burning bright lines in the
-sky, and fading out again into the darkness of night,
-exhibits a perfect harmony of kinds, directions, and
-rates of motions, as well as of changes in brightness.
-We have explained in Chapter III that things moving
-in similar directions are more pleasing than those
-crossing in opposite directions because they are easier
-for the eye to follow. And it is, of course, true that
-whatever hurts the eyes will probably not seem beautiful.
-But a picture must please our emotions as well
-as our eyes. We must feel that it is good, that it is
-in order, that it obeys some law of harmony. In the
-case of the sky rocket we do feel that there is unity
-and not discord, rest and not warfare. Though we
-may not stop to analyze the matter, we feel that at
-any one moment all of the burning elements are in
-perfect agreement, obeying the same law of motion.</p>
-
-<p>Now let us recall some familiar movie subjects,
-and test them for harmony. A common picture is
-that of a horse and an automobile racing side by side.
-Here there is similarity of direction, but there is no
-similarity of motion. The car glides; the horse
-bounds. The changing pattern which the horse describes
-with legs and neck and back and tail finds no
-parallel in the moving panel of the car. Besides, we
-feel that there is antagonism between the two. They
-hate each other. Their histories and destinies are different.
-They are not in harmony. A much better<span class="pagenum" id="Page_144">144</span>
-subject is a huntsman galloping over the countryside
-with a dog at the horse’s heels. Every action of the
-one animal is somewhat like every corresponding action
-of the other animal. One might even say that the
-horse is a large kind of dog, while the dog is a small
-kind of horse. And, as they cross the fields in loyalty
-to the same master, their motions harmonize.</p>
-
-<p>There would be unity of a similar kind in a picture
-of an automobile and a railroad train racing on parallel
-roads. Although they are two separate machines,
-their motions fuse into one thing, which we call a
-race. If the roads are not perfectly parallel but swing
-slowly away from and toward each other again, we
-get a pleasing rhythm of motions, yet, because the
-directions and speeds are similar, the unity still
-remains.</p>
-
-<p>But if we imagine the train dashing by a farmstead
-where a Dutch windmill sweeps its large arms slowly
-around, we would feel again a lack of unity between
-the two kinds of motions. The impression upon our
-minds would be confused; it would not be a single
-impression, because the moving objects show two
-different kinds of patterns, with rates of speed that
-are not sufficiently alike to be grasped as a unity. A
-better picture would be that of an old Dutch mill on
-the bank of a river whose sluggish waters flow wearily
-by. Perhaps even an old steamboat with a large paddle
-wheel might be so introduced that the revolutions
-and patterns of the two wheels would be similar, while
-the forward thrusts of the boat and the current would
-also be similar, all four movements blending together
-into a single harmony, like the music of four different
-instruments in an orchestra.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_145">145</span></p>
-
-<p>The orchestration of motions is, in fact, the proper
-work of the cinema composer. If he cannot control
-the objects which move before him, he is in as bad a
-way as the director of an orchestra who cannot make
-the musicians do his bidding. We can sympathize
-with the movie director, because some of the things
-he wants to bring into a picture are not so easily
-controlled as musicians. One can talk to a fiddler,
-but one cannot waste time talking to a brook or to a
-Dutch windmill. However, if a windmill will not
-behave itself, it can be dismissed no less promptly
-than a fiddler.</p>
-
-<p>The average photoplay seen in the theaters to-day
-could undoubtedly be improved by retaking it with at
-least half of the material omitted from every scene.
-The simplicity thus obtained would help to give a more
-unified effect, would be less of a strain on the eyes,
-and would require less effort of the mind. But simplicity
-is worshiped by only a few of our best directors.
-The average director who is asked to film a
-scene of a country girl in a barnyard, a scene in which
-simplicity itself should predominate, will produce a
-conglomeration of chickens fluttering, ducks waddling,
-calves frisking, a dog trotting back and forth, wagging
-his tail and snapping his jaws, gooseberry bushes shaking
-in the wind (always the wind), a brook rippling
-over pebbles, and, somewhere in the center of the
-excitement, the girl herself, scattering corn from her
-basket while her skirts flap fiercely about her knees.
-From such a picture the spectator goes out into the
-comparative quiet of crowded Broadway with a sigh
-of relief, thankful that he does not have to live amid
-the nerve-wracking scenes of a farm.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_146">146</span></p>
-
-<p>When we insist that the motions in a picture should
-be in harmony with each other because of the pictorial
-restfulness which thus results, we do not forget that
-motions should also be in harmony with the meaning,
-the dramatic action, which the scene contains. Some
-red-blooded reader of this book might possibly have
-the notion that artistic composition of a picture will
-rob it of its strength. Please may we ask such a person
-to read carefully Chapters II, IV, and VII of this
-book? We have maintained there that good pictorial
-composition can make any movie “punch” harder than
-ever. Let us illustrate that argument again. Suppose
-we “shoot” two brawny men in a fist fight. The
-motions of the men should have unity, even though
-their souls might lack it. It sounds like a contradiction,
-but the methods of the men fighting should harmonize
-in motion. If they do not, we cannot enjoy
-the fight. What would you think of a fist fight in
-which one man had the motions of a windmill, and
-the other had the motions of a chicken?</p>
-
-<p>Many movie directors have had stage experience,
-either as actors or directors, and are instinctively able
-to harmonize the dramatic pantomime of actors or
-actresses, whenever this pantomime takes place in the
-midst of perfectly quiet surroundings, as is usual in
-the setting of the theater stage. But as soon as these
-directors take their troupe out “on location” they
-encounter difficulties, because the wind nearly always
-blows costumes, bushes and trees into motion, because
-there are nearly always animals or moving vehicles
-on the scene, and because the “location” is more likely
-than not to include such things as fountains, waterfalls,
-or sea beaches. They find therefore, that the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_147">147</span>
-movement of the actors during any one moment of
-the picture is likely to be discounted by the gamboling
-of a lamb or the breaking of a sea wave during the
-next minute.</p>
-
-<p>The sea and surf possess a perfectly rhythmical
-motion which one may watch for hours without becoming
-weary. And the effect of that motion may well be
-heightened by composing it with other moving objects
-so that the various motions taken together will harmonize
-in directions, shapes, and velocities. Such
-composition was very well done in the climactic scenes
-of “The Love Light,” the Mary Pickford play directed
-by Frances Marion, who also wrote the story. Views
-of the sea breaking on the shore are shown time and
-again throughout the play, but the most impressive
-scenes are near the end where a sailing party lose control
-of their sloop in a storm and are shipwrecked on
-the shoals. Here the principal moving objects partake
-of the movements of the sea and therefore harmonize
-with it in tempo. The vessel rises and falls
-with the waves. The people above and below decks
-sway and lurch with the same motion. The water
-which breaks through the hatches and trickles down
-the companionway describes the same shapes and flows
-with the same rate as the water which breaks over
-and trickles down the rocks. The total effect is a
-single impression of motion in which the separate
-parts parallel and reinforce each other. And this total
-impression is sustained through many scenes, even
-though the position of the camera is often shifted and
-the subject is viewed from many angles. This cinematic
-climax is a good example for readers to keep
-in mind when they set out through the movie theaters<span class="pagenum" id="Page_148">148</span>
-in search of cases where the motion of nature has
-been successfully harmonized with those of other
-motions demanded by the action of the story.</p>
-
-<p>One of the ugliest of pictorial conflicts occurs when
-false motion and real motion are projected together
-upon the screen. Who has not been annoyed by the
-typical “follow” picture in which a lady is shown
-ascending a flight of stairs, while the stairs themselves
-(because the camera has been swept upward during
-the exposure) flow swiftly downward across the
-screen? The “follow” or “panoram” picture of moving
-things is usually bad because it falsifies real motion
-and gives the appearance of ugly motion to things
-which actually are at rest. An atrocious picture of a
-horse race, exhibited not very long ago, had been
-taken by carrying the camera on a motor car which
-had been kept abreast though not steadily abreast, of
-the horses. The result was that the grand stand,
-guard rails, and all fixed objects flew crazily from
-left to right, and that, because of the irregular swinging
-of the camera, the horses sometimes seemed to
-drop back together, even though they had clearly not
-slackened their speed.</p>
-
-<p>We have been discussing in the above paragraphs
-the harmony of pictorial motions which occur together
-at a given moment. They may have a harmony like
-that of musical notes struck in a chord. But pictorial
-motions come in a procession as well as abreast, and
-these successive motions may have a harmony like
-that which runs through a melody in music.</p>
-
-<p>In a stage play it is not difficult to organize simultaneous
-or successive actions so that the total action
-will produce a single effect, because all the movements<span class="pagenum" id="Page_149">149</span>
-of human performers are naturally very much of the
-same style. The gestures and postures of a performer
-in any given action are very likely to be followed by
-similar gestures and postures at frequent intervals
-during the play. Stage directors have developed their
-traditions of unity and harmony through centuries of
-theatrical history. They have learned to preserve,
-not only the “key” of the action, but the “tempo” as
-well. If they strike a certain pace at the beginning
-of the act or play they will maintain that pace
-with practically no variation to the end.</p>
-
-<p>It would be most desirable if unity of motion could
-be sustained throughout the entire length of a photoplay,
-as in a stage play or in a musical composition.
-There should be a real continuity of pictures, as there
-is supposed to be “continuity” of actions described in
-a scenario. But such continuity is hard to find on
-the screen. In “The Love Light,” for instance, the
-film which we have just discussed, there is little unity
-of motion except in the climactic scenes. The very
-action from which the title “The Love Light” is
-derived, is botched in composition. The light is that
-of a lighthouse and the heroine manipulates it so as
-to throw a signal to her lover. This action is shown
-in a series of cut-backs from a close-up of a girl in
-the lighthouse to a general view of the sea below and
-to a close-up of the hero. But the lantern with its
-apparatus of prisms makes a cylindrical pattern which
-does not harmonize in shape with the long white
-pencil of the searchlight sweeping the sea. Nor does
-it harmonize in motion, for the simple reason that the
-sweeping ray moves clock-wise, in spite of the fact
-that the girl rotates the lantern counter-clock-wise.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_150">150</span></p>
-
-<p>Two other discrepancies in these scenes may be
-noted. One is that in the close-ups the lantern does
-not appear to be lighted, and the other is that lighthouses
-do not, as a rule, send out light in pencil-like
-shape.</p>
-
-<p>The scene above cited lacks pictorial unity, in spite
-of the fact that the neighboring scenes are in perfect
-unity of dramatic meaning. This illustrates the dangerous
-difference between saying things in words and
-saying them in pictures. If we write, for example,
-“she swings the lantern around slowly, etc.,” no reader
-is likely to question whether the lantern is lighted or
-not, or whether it is rotated in one direction or the
-opposite. But the camera impolitely tells the whole
-truth. And some truths are full of fight when they
-are brought face to face with each other.</p>
-
-<p>The suddenness with which one scene leaps to the
-next on the screen is a factor which many directors
-and most scenario writers fail to reckon with. In
-Chapter III we have discussed at some length the
-effect which these sudden jumps have upon our eyes.
-It remains now to see how the “flash” from one scene
-to another affects our minds. In “Barbary Sheep,”
-directed by Maurice Tourneur, there is bad joining
-which may be illustrated by naming a succession of
-three scenes. They are: (1) A picture of a mountain
-sheep some distance away on the edge of a cliff, sharp
-against the sky, an excellent target for a hunter. (2)
-The hero out hunting. He sees something, aims his
-gun obliquely upward. Our eyes follow the line of
-the gun toward the upper left-hand corner of the
-frame. (3) Some society ladies in a room.</p>
-
-<p>Perhaps the reader can guess, even from this incomplete<span class="pagenum" id="Page_151">151</span>
-description in words, how sudden and complete
-was the shock of scene 3 coming after the preparation
-of scene 2. There was a complete violation of unity
-of meanings, as well as of motions. We cannot say
-who was to blame for this bad art, whether it was the
-director, or some one in the “cutting room.” Possibly
-some motion picture operator had mutilated the film
-in the theater. The fact remains that this part of the
-picture as it reached the audience was badly composed.
-The promise of one scene was not only ignored but
-ridiculed in the next scene.</p>
-
-<p>An excellent illustration of how the promise made
-by a scene can be beautifully fulfilled for the eye by
-a following scene may be found in Griffith’s “The Idol
-Dancer.” Incidentally the joining shows how false
-motion may be harmonized with real motion. Let the
-reader imagine himself looking at a motion picture
-screen. The setting is a New England country road
-in winter. Into the picture from the lower right side
-of the frame comes a one-horse sleigh, which, as it
-glides along the road, describes a curving motion over
-the screen, first to the left and then upward to the
-right. It then begins curving to the left again, when
-the scene is suddenly cut. The effect on our eyes at
-this moment is such that we expect a continuation of
-motion toward the left, a completion of the swing.
-And this is just what we get in the next picture, which
-shows, not the sleigh at all, but the motion of the
-landscape gliding by, from right to left, as the sleigh-riders
-themselves might have seen it. We feel a
-pleasure of the eye somewhat akin to the pleasure of
-our ears when a musician strikes a note which the
-melody has led us to expect. Griffith’s touch of art in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_152">152</span>
-this joining is especially delightful because it is so
-subtle that any spectator, though he would surely feel
-it, would not observe it unless he were especially
-occupied in the analysis of motion on the screen.</p>
-
-<p>Sometimes two scenes may be joined in perfect harmony
-of motions and yet show a conflict of meanings.
-In “The Love Light,” above mentioned, we have one
-scene where the hero is about to take refuge in the
-cellar beneath the room occupied by the heroine. He
-raises a trap door, goes down the steps, and, as he
-descends slowly, closes the door behind him. This
-downward-swinging motion of the door is in our eyes
-when the scene is cut, and the next instant we see the
-outer door of the house swinging open suddenly as
-the heroine rushes out into the yard. The motions of
-the two doors are in perfect unity and balance, but
-we are shocked nevertheless, because, since our minds
-and eyes were on the hero in the cellar, we had expected
-another view of him beneath the trap door.</p>
-
-<p>But there are worse compositions than this in the
-movie theaters. Sometimes whole plays are out of
-unity from beginning to end. A notorious example
-was a photoplay called “The Birth of a Race,” which
-began with Adam and Eve and ended up with visions
-of the future, touching as it ran such things as little
-Moses and the Daughter of Pharaoh, the slave drivers
-of Egypt, the exodus of Israel, the crucifixion of
-Christ, the three ships of Columbus, the signing of the
-Declaration of Independence, Lincoln and the Emancipation
-Proclamation, the World War, German spies,
-steel works in the United States, a strike of the
-workers, etc., etc. All of these scenes were badly
-joined, but the greatest shock of all came when the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_153">153</span>
-action jumped in a flash from Christ and the two
-thieves writhing in crucifixion to the three ships of
-Columbus heeling gracefully in a light breeze.</p>
-
-<p>Merely to hint at the contents of such a play is, we
-hope, sufficient criticism. Without harmony of subject
-matter there certainly can be no harmony of treatment.
-And if the director of “The Birth of a Race”
-offers as his defense that he did not write the story,
-we can only retort that he should not have picturized
-it. Even when the subject matter is in continuous
-unity it requires a skillful, painstaking, sincere director
-to weave its various materials into a single harmony
-of impressiveness.</p>
-
-<p>Perhaps we have continued long enough the discussion
-of the many-sided nature and the artistic value
-of pictorial motions at rest. Let us simply add that
-the kind of rest we have in mind is never the rest
-of inaction, of sleep, or of death; it is rather a dynamic
-repose. Just as the still portions of the motion picture
-may be active upon the spectator’s mind, so the motions
-may be reposeful while they are both at work
-and at play. Such harmony of pictorial motions on
-the screen is not too high an ideal for the lovers of
-the cinema. The glimpses we get of that ideal now
-are enough to assure us that as time goes on more
-and more directors will be filled with inspiration and
-will achieve triumphant expression through their
-chosen art.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_154" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_154">154</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">MASTERY IN THE MOVIES</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">Who</span> is the legitimate master in movie making? It is,
-of course, the director, and he should take complete
-command over the plot action of the photoplay, over
-the players and their accessories, over the settings and
-those who make the settings, over the camera men,
-over the cutters, joiners, and title writers; in short,
-over all those who are co-workers in photoplay making.
-If this mastery cannot be obtained; if writers
-and players and scene painters will not agree to shed
-their royal purple for the badge of service; if all those
-who co-operate in making a photoplay cannot see that
-the product must be judged by its total effect and not
-by mere details of performance, then, of course we
-shall never have art upon the screen.</p>
-
-<p>But it is usually very difficult for the director to
-take and keep complete command. Among the first
-rebels against his authority is the writer of the story
-which is to be filmed. It would be best, of course, if
-the director could originate his own plot, as a painter
-conceives his idea for a painting, or if he could, at
-least, prepare his own scenario as studiously as the
-painter makes his own preliminary sketches for a
-painting. But, under the present system, these two
-tasks of movie making can only in exceptional cases
-be performed in detail by the same person. The next<span class="pagenum" id="Page_155">155</span>
-best thing, then, is for the writer to limit himself to
-the bare subject matter of a picture, that is, the general
-action in which the characters are involved, while
-the director takes the responsibility for the pictorial
-treatment of this subject matter.</p>
-
-<p>Now comes an interesting question. Which has the
-more artistic weight on the screen, the treatment of
-the subject, that is the presentation of the story
-pictorially, or the subject as such regardless of its
-presentation? The same question may be asked of any
-masterpiece of art; is it distinctive because of the subject
-matter or because of what the artist has done
-to that subject matter? In other words, would the
-subject matter remain distinctive even if it were badly
-treated?</p>
-
-<p>There are sometimes happenings in real life that
-can hold one’s unwavering attention, no matter how
-poorly presented in language or picture. For example,
-if a panic-stricken idiot were to rush to you and
-say, “It were quick, oh, explosion by Wall Street and
-lots of fellers shut up dead and J. P. Morgan’s windows
-all over bloody men every way,” you would be
-shocked—not amused—and you would not stop to
-consider the ridiculous language of the report. And
-if by some strange coincidence a camera man had
-secured a motion picture of that explosion in Wall
-Street, you would be curious to see that picture, and
-would undoubtedly be impressed by it, no matter how
-ineffective might be its photography or pictorial composition.</p>
-
-<p>In fiction there may be certain chains of incidents,
-such as the action of a detective story, which might
-carry a strong dramatic appeal, even though the language<span class="pagenum" id="Page_156">156</span>
-of the narrator were crude, confused, obscure,
-weak, and of no beauty appropriate to the thing expressed.
-“There may be,” we say; but all self-respecting
-writers will agree with us that language-proof
-stories are extremely rare. The story is usually impressive
-because of the telling, and not in spite of it.</p>
-
-<p>In the motion picture, naturally, the telling is not
-in words, but in arrangements of lines and shapes, of
-tones and textures, of lights and shadows, these values
-being either fixed or changing, and exhibited simultaneously
-or in succession. Whatever arrangement
-the director makes comes directly to us in the theater.
-Barring accident we see it unchanged on the screen,
-and, as far as we are concerned, it is the only treatment
-which the story has.</p>
-
-<p>It is true, of course, that cinematographic treatment
-may be vaguely suggested by written or spoken words;
-it may be more definitely suggested by drawings; but
-it can never actually be given either by words or drawings.
-Even the director himself cannot know definitely,
-in advance of the actual rehearsing and taking
-of the picture, just what the composition will be. He
-may plan in advance, but he does not actually compose
-until the players are on the scene and the camera
-“grinding.” During those moments are created the
-actual designs which become fixed permanently in the
-film.</p>
-
-<p>Turning from pictures for a moment, let us consider
-the relation between plot and treatment in literary
-art. It is interesting to study Shakespeare’s
-attitude toward the material which he borrowed for
-his plays. Glance through the introduction and notes
-of any school text, and you will see that the plot which<span class="pagenum" id="Page_157">157</span>
-came to his hand ready-made was not held sacred.
-He twisted it, tore out pieces from it, or spun it together
-with other plots similarly altered. And even
-then the altered plot, though an improvement over the
-raw material, was not a masterpiece; it was only a
-better framework for masterly treatment.</p>
-
-<p>In the art of Shakespeare it is the telling, not the
-framework, of the story that counts. Hence any play
-of his becomes a poor thing indeed if you take away
-from it the tone-color of his words, the rhythm of his
-lines, the imaginative appeal of his imagery, the stimulating
-truth in his casual comment on character and
-deed. When a play of Shakespeare is filmed, those
-literary values are lost; it cannot in the nature of the
-motion picture be otherwise.</p>
-
-<p>On the other hand, the distinctive value and particular
-charm of a photoplay lies in its pictorial treatment,
-in what the director does pictorially with the
-subject in hand. And that distinctive value would in
-turn be lost if some one else attempted to transfer the
-picture to a literary medium.</p>
-
-<p>In view of all this it is surely fair to say that if a
-writer and a picture-maker were to co-operate in producing
-a piece of literature, the writer should be in
-command; but when they co-operate in producing a
-picture the picture-maker should be in command.</p>
-
-<p>Now when the director is in command of the story,
-what does he do with it? He may permit the incidents
-to stand in their original order, or he may change
-or omit or add. But in any case he sweeps away the
-phrases, sentences, and paragraphs which describe the
-places of the action, and erects instead real settings, or
-selects suitable “locations” from already existing settings.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_158">158</span>
-He marshals forth real human beings to perform
-the parts which are described in words. He
-divides the action into limited periods of time, and
-decides how to connect these periods visually so that
-the pictorial movement on the screen may be a flowing
-unity. The director, not the writer, does this;
-and, if he were satisfied to do less, he would be only
-partly a director. His work is not the “translation”
-of literature into motion pictures; it is a complete substitution
-of motion pictures for literature.</p>
-
-<p>When we analyze pictorial composition on the
-screen we must proceed as we have done throughout
-this book. We must look at it from the point of view
-of the spectator in the theater. The spectator does
-not see the setting with one eye and the actors with
-the other, he does not separate the respective movements
-of human beings, animals, trees, water, fire,
-etc., as they play before him, and he does not disconnect
-any one scene from the scenes which precede
-or follow it. To him everything on the screen is connected
-with everything else there. The connection
-may be strong or weak, bad or beautiful, but it is
-nevertheless a connection. This ought to be clear
-enough to any one who gives the matter any thought;
-yet there are scene designers who appear to believe
-that their setting is a complete work of art quite
-independent of the actors, for whom and with whom
-it ought to be composed, and there are certainly any
-number of players who look upon themselves as stars
-that dwell apart.</p>
-
-<p>We do not underestimate the individual power of
-the player as an interpreter of the deeds and emotions
-of dramatic characters. Pantomimic acting is one of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_159">159</span>
-the most personal of arts, yet the acting in a photoplay
-is a somewhat smaller factor in the total result
-than acting in the stage pantomime; and neither kind
-of acting can compare in importance with acting in
-the stage play, where the magic of the actor’s voice
-works its spell upon the audience.</p>
-
-<p>In the photoplay the player, whether at rest or in
-action, is usually the emphatic part of the picture; but
-he is only a part, and the relation between that part
-and the other parts of the picture can best be established
-by the director. If the player attempts to compose
-the picture in which he appears, he is handicapped,
-not only because he cannot see himself, but also because
-he cannot see any other portion of the composition
-from the same point of view as the ultimate spectator
-who is temporarily represented by the director.
-He is, in fact, in danger of spoiling his own pantomime,
-of destroying his own power.</p>
-
-<p>The frequent abuse of the close-up, for example,
-is often due to the mistaken idea that an actor’s facial
-expression is the sole means of representing emotion.
-To think that dramatic pantomime consists of making
-faces is just as foolish as to think that dancing is
-merely a matter of shaking the feet and legs. It is
-really as important for a screen actress to be able to
-show grief with her elbows or knees as for a dancer
-to have rhythm in her neck. The “star” actress, therefore,
-who insists on several facial close-ups per reel
-reveals a lack of capability in her own art, as well
-as an over-developed appreciation of her own looks.
-The further objection to the close-up is that it takes
-the player out of the picture. For the moment all the
-setting, all the other players are shut off from sight.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_160">160</span>
-It is as though a painter, while entertaining a group
-of friends with a view of a newly finished work, were
-suddenly to cover the whole painting except a single
-spot, and then to say, “Now forget the rest of the
-picture, and just look at this spot. Isn’t it wonderful?”</p>
-
-<p>The player should, of course, always be in perfect
-union with the rest of the picture, yet carrying as
-much emphasis as the story demands. But even when
-the player wisely desires to remain in the picture,
-he should not be allowed to determine his own position,
-pose, or movement there. He is, after all, only
-a glorified model with which the artist works.</p>
-
-<p>When an actress moves about in a room, for example,
-she cannot know that to the eye of the camera
-her nose seems to collide with the corner of the mantel-piece,
-that her neck is pressed out of shape by a bad
-shadow, that her gesture points out some gim-crack
-of no dramatic significance at the moment, that her
-movement is throwing her out of balance with some
-other movement in the scene, that her walking, sitting,
-or rising appears awkward, in spite of the fact
-that it feels natural and rhythmical to her. These and
-a thousand other accidents of composition can be
-avoided only by the player’s instant obedience to an
-alert and masterful director who can stop or guide
-the moving factor in the picture as surely as a painter
-can stop or guide his brush.</p>
-
-<p>When the action takes place out of doors, or in
-an interior setting with considerable depth, the player
-is still more ignorant of what the composition looks
-like to the eye of the camera. Whether the movement
-of a particular person will harmonize with a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_161">161</span>
-swaying willow tree and with the shadows playing
-over the ground, can be discovered only by experiments
-viewed from the angle of the camera. And
-even then, after the action has been carefully planned
-through a succession of rehearsals, it may have to be
-varied during the actual “shooting.” A sudden change
-of wind or light or an unexpected movement of a dog
-or horse may bring in a new factor that must be instantly
-taken into account.</p>
-
-<p>At the beginning and end of a scene the player
-should be especially pliable under the hands of the
-director, because the latter alone knows what the
-cinematic connection is to be with the preceding and
-following scenes. The lack of control in this pictorial
-continuity is often evident on the screen. Separate
-scenes become little dramas in themselves, and the
-whole photoplay is then really a succession of acts,
-with a structure always tending to fall apart, instead
-of cohering firmly into a unity. The peculiar difficulty
-in the movies is that the scenes are not taken
-in the same order as they are projected in the theater.
-On the screen the scenes shift more quickly than the
-actors could pass from one setting to the next, and
-yet the actual taking of those actions may have been
-weeks or even months apart. This is so because it is
-more economical to let the particular setting, and not
-the continuity of action, determine the grouping of
-the “shots.”</p>
-
-<p>Thus, for example, the scenes numbered 9, 22, 25,
-41, 98, and 133, with a drawing-room as setting, may
-all be taken on a single day, while numbers 8, 40,
-and 134, with a street as setting, may be taken some
-other day. And still another group of disconnected<span class="pagenum" id="Page_162">162</span>
-scenes may be taken a month later “on location” hundreds
-of miles away. This may be a fine system of
-efficiency for the manufacturer, but it often plays
-havoc with pictorial continuity. When an actress
-goes directly from scene 98 to 133, for example, she
-may be able to remember whether the latter scene is
-supposed to find her still single or already divorced,
-but she cannot be allowed to determine her own positions,
-pauses, tempo and general nature of movement,
-because that might spoil the transition from scene
-132, which is not to be “shot” until several days later!</p>
-
-<p>The farther we go into the study of the relation
-between the player and the rest of the motion picture,
-the more we realize that this relation can best be
-established and controlled by the director, and that
-the player is, in a sense, only a pigment with which
-the director paints.</p>
-
-<p>“But what of the movie fans?” you ask. “Are
-they not more interested in the performer as a performer
-than in the play as a play, or in the picture
-as a picture?” Yes, the audience is undoubtedly “crazy
-about the star,” but that is largely because they have
-not been given anything else to be crazy about. It
-is true that we all admire the distinction of individual
-performers in any kind of entertainment; yet we would
-not approve of a football game, for example, in which
-the “star” half-back made so many brilliant plays that
-the rest of the eleven could not prevent the opposing
-team from piling up a winning score, or of a baseball
-game which was lost because the batter with a world’s
-record refused to make a “sacrifice hit.” And, besides,
-a distinguished actor or actress may remain
-distinguished even after having submitted to the directing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_163">163</span>
-of the master cinema composer, just as a figure
-in a painting may still be fascinating even though the
-painter has made it a thoroughly organic part of the
-whole composition.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_163" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 26em;">
- <img src="images/i_163.jpg" width="1658" height="2166" alt="" />
- <div class="caption"><i>Portrait of Charles I</i>, a painting by Van Dyck. The composition is
-characterized by rhythm of tone and line, balance of design, and
-skilful subordination of interests. Many of the principles that
-underlie good painting may be successfully applied in a motion
-picture. See <a href="#Page_80">page 80</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>As the figure is really only a part of the motion
-picture so the setting is also only a part, and neither
-the setting nor the figure should be considered sufficient
-unto itself. One without the other is really incomplete;
-together they can be organized into a unified picture.
-This simple truth, always recognized by painters,
-has often been ignored, both by stage directors and
-motion picture directors. Perhaps the explanation is
-to be found in the materials with which the three
-different composers work. In a painting both the
-figure and the background are only paint, only representations
-side by side on a flat surface, and therefore
-easily admit of a perfect fusion of material. But
-in the case of stage drama the situation is different.
-The stage composition does not give us a similar natural
-blending of actor and background. The actor is
-a real human being, so near the spectators that some
-of them could touch him with their hands, while the
-background is merely an artificial representation of a
-room, a garden, or a cliff. The two elements of the
-stage picture refuse to mix, and the average spectator
-seems quite content to take them separately. In fact,
-it is not unusual for the audience to “give the scenery
-a hand” long before a single figure has entered to
-complete the composition.</p>
-
-<p>Now the screen picture is entirely different from
-the stage picture, because on the screen everything we
-see is photographic representation, mere gradations of
-light and shadow, just as everything on the canvas<span class="pagenum" id="Page_164">164</span>
-of a painting is paint. In the motion picture without
-color the boundary line of a window or a table is
-described in exactly the same medium as the contour
-of an actor’s face; and the actor’s complexion differs
-from the wall paper only in being lighter or darker.
-It should be impossible, therefore, to consider that
-the photoplay setting is a complete, independent picture,
-and that the actors are separate visible things
-merely placed in front of the setting. And if the
-movie director makes the mistake of not fusing actor
-and setting into a pictorial composition, it is perhaps
-because he imagines the spectator with himself in the
-studio, where the scene and action are like those of
-the stage, instead of putting himself with the spectator
-before the screen.</p>
-
-<p>But there are signs of awakening in the theater of
-the stage play. More and more the influence of such
-European masters as Max Reinhardt and Gordon
-Craig is being felt. According to their method of
-production the setting and the actors are interdependent
-and make a co-operative appeal to the eye of the
-audience. The young designers in the United States
-are beginning to think of the dramatic picture as a
-whole, rather than of the setting as a self-sufficient
-exhibition of their skill in painting. Mr. Lee Simonson,
-for example, not long ago, in commenting on his
-designs for the Theater Guild’s production of “The
-Faithful,” said that he purposely designed his sets so
-that they would seem top-heavy until the actors entered
-and filled in the comparatively empty zone near the
-bottom of the stage picture. Without the presence of
-the actor, he declared, one could never say that the
-set was good or bad; one could only say that it was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_165">165</span>
-incomplete. Such reasoning would do a great deal of
-good in the movie studios, from which a vast amount
-of silly publicity “dope” has come, announcing that this
-or that photoplay was highly artistic because such-and-such
-a well-known painter had been engaged to design
-the interior settings. One might as well say that a
-certain art student’s mural decoration was good because
-a famous master had begun the work by painting
-a background for the figures, or that a piece of
-music was beautiful because a master composer had
-written an accompaniment which somebody else had
-afterward combined with a melody.</p>
-
-<p>In the cinema composition the director must, of
-course, have mastery over the places, as well as over
-the persons of a film story. He can then make the
-setting a live, active part of the picture instead of
-merely a dead background; he may truly dramatize
-it.<a id="FNanchor_5" href="#Footnote_5" class="fnanchor">E</a> A notable example of the perfect blending of
-dramatic theme, actors, and setting is the German
-photoplay “The Cabinet of Dr. Caligari,” which was
-first shown to the American public in April, 1921.
-This film, produced by the Decla Company, was
-directed by Mr. Robert Wien, and the scenic designs
-were made by Herman Warm, Walter Reiman, and
-Walter Rork. When the “movie fan” sees the beginning
-of this photoplay he is startled by the strange
-shapes of places. Houses and rooms are not laid out
-four-square, but look as though they had been built
-by a cyclone and finished up by a thunderstorm. Windows
-are sick triangles, floors are misbehaved surfaces
-and shadows are streaked with gleaming white. Streets<span class="pagenum" id="Page_166">166</span>
-writhe as though in distress and the skies are of the
-inky blackness that fills even strong men with foreboding.
-The people are equally bizarre. They resemble
-cartoons rather than fellow humans, and their
-minds are strangely warped.</p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-
-<p><a id="Footnote_5" href="#FNanchor_5" class="fnanchor">E</a> The subject of dramatizing a setting is discussed at length
-in Chapter VIII of “The Art of Photoplay Making.”</p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>In the presence of all this the spectator feels that
-the screen has gone mad; yet he does not leave the
-theater, because his attention is chained and his emotions
-are beginning to surge with a peculiarly pleasing
-unrest. He stays and stares at the remarkable
-fitness of these crazy people in crazy places; for the
-story is, in fact, a madman’s fantasy of crimes committed
-by a sleep-walker under the hypnotic control
-of a physician who is the head of an insane asylum.</p>
-
-<p>When we examine this photoplay critically we discover,
-not only that the settings are perfectly sympathetic
-with the action, but that the various factors
-are skillfully organized into an excellent pictorial composition.
-Look, for example, at the “still,” facing
-<a href="#Page_179">page 179</a>, and you will observe the uncanny emphasis
-upon the dark sleep-walker who slinks along the wall
-and a moment later turns upward into the hallway on
-his evil errand to the bed-chamber of the heroine.
-Place that figure in an ordinary village alley and it
-will lose half its horror; keep it out of this weird
-setting and the place will cry out for some one to
-come into it in pursuit of crime.</p>
-
-<p>Study the plan of the pictorial design and you will
-see that as soon as the man has emerged from the
-shadows in the background he becomes the strongest
-accent in an area of white. The end of the alley from
-which he comes is accented by the jagged white shape
-above the shadows, and the doorway through which<span class="pagenum" id="Page_167">167</span>
-he goes is similarly accented by irregular shapes.
-These two accents keep the composition in balance,
-and when our glance passes from one to the other
-the path of attention must cross the area of central
-interest. There is rhythm in the composition, too,
-though one would scarcely realize it at first glance.
-Note the swinging curves in the white patch on the
-street and in the corresponding patch on the wall, and
-note also how some of these curves harmonize with
-the lines of the actor’s body and with his shadow upon
-the wall.</p>
-
-<p>The “still” which we have just analyzed is typical
-of the cinema scenes throughout “The Cabinet of Dr.
-Caligari.” Whether the subject is the unscrupulous
-Doctor in his office within the gates of the insane
-asylum, or the unnatural sleep-walker cramped in his
-cabinet, or the innocent girl asleep in a sea of white
-coverlets, or the gawking villagers at the fake shows
-of the fair, the two factors of person and place complete
-each other in a masterly composition. But that
-composition as a whole was not made either by the
-actors or by the designers of settings; they were happily
-helpful, but the director was the master composer.</p>
-
-<p>Any one who sees “The Cabinet of Dr. Caligari” is
-likely to remark that the settings would not be of
-much value in any story except the one for which
-they were designed. What a fine compliment to this
-photoplay as art! Perhaps some one long ago in the
-gray dawn of musical composition made a remark
-that the accompaniment in a certain piece of music
-could hardly serve for another melody than the one
-for which it was composed! At any rate let us hope<span class="pagenum" id="Page_168">168</span>
-that in the future the lover of the films may not look
-in vain for weird stories in uncanny haunts, for fairy
-tales in whimsical nooks, for epic dramas in spacious
-domains, for comedies in funny places; and let us
-hope, too, that he will find the compositions so perfect
-that not a single setting would have any artistic value
-apart from its own story.</p>
-
-<p>“But what of nature?” says some one. “Must the
-movie director have mastery over the works of the
-Creator, too?” Indeed he must! Because if he is an
-artist he is a creator; and if nature becomes a medium
-in his art, then he must have mastery over that medium
-insofar as it enters the art. Hills have been levelled,
-streams have been dried up, and valleys have been
-filled with water, all for the welfare or profit of man.
-Mastery of this kind costs money; but are not the
-movie magnates noted for their fearlessness in signing
-checks?</p>
-
-<p>Wealthy men have been known to build landscapes
-for their own pleasure; there is no very valid reason
-why they should not build landscapes for their own
-business, especially when that business is an art. The
-movie director of to-day wears out automobiles searching
-the country for “locations” that will do as natural
-backgrounds for screen stories; and in this enthusiasm
-he is almost as amateurish as the kodak fiend who
-scours the country for good things to snap. The movie
-director of some to-morrow will not look for natural
-backgrounds; he will make them.</p>
-
-<p>When an artist paints a picture of a natural subject
-he does not try to reproduce exactly the material things
-which he sees before him. He rises far above the
-craft of the copyist into the divinity of creation. His<span class="pagenum" id="Page_169">169</span>
-painting is always a personal variation of the natural
-theme. If seven trees suit his composition better
-than the seventeen which he views, he paints only
-seven, and if there are only five in the grove, he
-creates two more on his canvas. If the waterfall is
-too high or too violent he reshapes it into the ideal
-one of his vision. This he does, not because nature
-is not beautiful in most of her aspects, but because
-no single one of those aspects fits into the scheme of
-the new beauty which he as an artist is trying to
-create.</p>
-
-<p>But the cinema composer does not work in so plastic
-a medium as paint. The camera is only a recording
-machine, working without the power of altering what
-it sees. The subject must be altered by the director
-before the camera man begins “shooting.” On a small
-scale this is perhaps already being done. Bushes, for
-example, may be cleared out from among the trees,
-and possibly even a tree or two may be chopped
-down in order to facilitate the carrying on of certain
-dramatic actions. We should like to see the ax wielded
-also in the cause of such things as simplicity, or
-balance, or rhythm in pictorial composition. Already
-bridges are being built especially for certain scenes in
-photoplays. We should like to see the cinema engineers
-called upon also to put an extra bend in the
-creek, or to make the waterfall only half as large, or
-to shape the bank into a more graceful slope whenever
-any change of that sort might serve to organize
-the setting more harmoniously with the general design
-of the picture.</p>
-
-<p>Already grass has been mown to suit a director.
-We should like to see grass grown especially for the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_170">170</span>
-director. They already make sunshine and wind and
-rain for motion pictures. We should like to see
-trees planted and tended for a dozen or fifty years,
-if necessary, in order to provide a more pictorial natural
-background for one or a dozen film stories.</p>
-
-<p>In thus advocating a new art of cinema landscape
-gardening we do not mean to imply that nature untouched
-is not full of beauty. We know well enough
-that the rhythm of line in the horizon of a rolling
-country, or in the lights and shadows of trees massed
-in the distance is often a delight to the beholder. But
-natural beauty of that sort is admissible to a cinema
-composition only when it is itself the dramatic theme
-of the story, and can be emphasized by the introduction
-of human figures or other elements, or when it
-can be subordinated to something else which is the
-dramatic theme. If nature cannot be thus composed
-she may still be photographed by the maker of scenics,
-travel pictures, etc., but she is of no practical value
-to the director of photoplays.</p>
-
-<p>But there is perhaps a question brewing in some
-reader’s mind. “Would it not be ridiculously extravagant,”
-he asks, “to construct a real landscape especially
-for a photoplay, since you maintain that any particular
-setting, if it is a proper part of a good composition,
-will have little artistic value apart from the particular
-action for which it has been designed?”</p>
-
-<p>Yes, it would certainly be extravagant to spend ten
-years producing a natural setting which could be used
-only for two days of movie “shooting.” But our
-theories really do not lead to any such conclusion.
-First, any landscape which has been designed especially
-for cinema composition, can be “shot” from fifty or<span class="pagenum" id="Page_171">171</span>
-a hundred different points of view, and yet can have
-separate artistic value from every angle. And, second,
-any such landscape would alter itself periodically and
-gradually through seasons and years. And, third, the
-cinema landscape engineer could make considerable
-alterations again and again without destroying the
-landscape. Thus, even if only a single square mile
-of land were used, it might well serve a film company
-for a number of years; and meanwhile other
-landscapes would be in the making on other square
-miles of land. However, it is not the critic’s business
-to enter into the ways and means of financing the
-production of art. He only undertakes to express
-the refined taste of the thoughtful public, the public
-which in the long run it will pay the producers to
-please.</p>
-
-<p>We desire the director’s mastery in the movies to
-extend also to that phase of pictorial composition
-which is known as the “cutting and joining” of scenes.
-Bad work in this department of photoplay making is
-something which cannot be counteracted by the most
-inspired pantomime, by the most beautiful setting, or
-by the most perfect composition in the separate scenes.
-Without careful cutting and joining the photoplay can
-never achieve that dynamic movement, that rhythmical
-flow which is a characteristic and distinguishing quality
-of the motion picture as art. It should be as important
-for the cinema composer to decide upon the
-progression and transformation of scenes as it is for
-the poet to arrange the order and transitions of his
-own verses and stanzas, or for the musical composer
-to arrange the movement through the music which he
-writes. Some directors seem to forget that a piece<span class="pagenum" id="Page_172">172</span>
-of art can exert its power only through that final
-form which comes in direct contact with the appreciator.
-And many of the others who desire to preserve
-their work intact must gnash their teeth at the
-thought that no matter how carefully they may cut and
-join a film, it is likely to be marred before it reaches
-the projecting machine.</p>
-
-<p>An example of the amazing lack of artistic co-operation
-in the movie world is furnished by the following
-press notice, sent out from one of the largest
-moving picture theaters on Broadway. “Audiences
-who see a film projected on the screen at the ——
-Theater, seldom take the details connected with its
-showing into consideration. It is a well-known fact
-that a photoplay is seldom presented at the —— in
-the form it is received from the manufacturer. Every
-foot of film is carefully perused and cuts are made,
-either for complete elimination or for replacement
-in a more appropriate part of the story.”</p>
-
-<p>Add to such deliberate desecration the havoc
-wrought by censors and by the eliminations caused
-by fire or breakage and you have a prospect of butchery
-which is bad enough to make any artist drop his
-work in despair. There is no hope for him unless
-he can organize his photoplay so perfectly and make
-its definite final form so compellingly beautiful that
-even a dull mechanician in a projecting booth would
-recognize it as a sacred thing which must be kept
-intact as it came from the hands of the master.</p>
-
-<p>But a photoplay is often robbed of pictorial continuity
-long before it reaches the exhibitor. The
-“title-writer,” who frequently combines his office with
-that of “cutter,” is at best, a dangerous collaborator<span class="pagenum" id="Page_173">173</span>
-on a photoplay. Words in the form of titles, sub-titles,
-dialogue, comments, etc., are rarely in place on the
-screen. If they are admitted for the purpose of telling
-or explaining a part of the story, they come as a
-slur on the art of the motion picture, and often as
-an insult to the intelligence of the spectator.<a id="FNanchor_6" href="#Footnote_6" class="fnanchor">F</a> Nevertheless,
-the producer finds words practically useful
-as stop-gaps, padding, and general support for an
-ill-directed play that would otherwise have to be
-scrapped. And even the most prominent directors are
-inclined to lean heavily on words. We are doomed,
-therefore, to endure the hybrid art of reading matter
-mixed with illustrations, at least for many years to
-come. But we insist that this mixture shall be no
-worse than the director makes it.</p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-
-<p><a id="Footnote_6" href="#FNanchor_6" class="fnanchor">F</a> Words which appear as an organic part of the action,
-such as writing, print, sign-boards, etc., do not come under
-the general category of “cut-in titles.” For a discussion of
-the dramatic value of words on the screen see Chapter IX of
-“The Art of Photoplay Making.”</p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>After a director has carefully composed a series of
-scenes so that the motions and patterns and textures
-and tones dissolve, from one moment to the next,
-in a rhythmical flow, regardless of how the story may
-have shifted its setting, we do not want some film
-doctor to come along and break that unity into pieces
-for the sake of a few jokes, or near-jokes, or for a
-few words of schoolroom wisdom or of sentimental
-gush. We object, not only to the content, the denotation
-of such “titles,” but also to their pictorial
-appearance.</p>
-
-<p>That written words have pictorial appearance is a
-fact which most of us forgot as soon as we learned
-to read. We realize that Chinese characters or Egyptian<span class="pagenum" id="Page_174">174</span>
-hieroglyphics are pictorial, that they are drawings;
-but we forget that the characters and arrangements
-of our own writing and printing are also drawings.
-Judged as pictures the words on the screen are
-usually too severely white for the background. They
-fairly flash at you. Also the horizontal lines made
-by the tops and bottoms of the letters constitute a
-sort of grill-work which hardly ever blends pictorially
-with the pattern of the preceding or following scene.</p>
-
-<p>As to the design of the letters themselves we find
-considerable variety on the screen, often with no direct
-reference to the meaning of the words or to the picture
-where they are inserted. Thus the tendency to
-introduce y’s and g’s with magnificent sweeping tails,
-or capital letters in fantastic curves, while revealing
-a commendable impulse to make writing pictorial, often
-leads to overemphasis, or to a direct conflict with
-other pictorial values in the film.<a id="FNanchor_7" href="#Footnote_7" class="fnanchor">G</a></p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-
-<p><a id="Footnote_7" href="#FNanchor_7" class="fnanchor">G</a> A neat pictorial touch in the titles of the German play,
-“The Golem,” is the suggestion of Hebrew script in the
-shaping of the letters.</p>
-
-</div>
-
-<p>Furthermore, the eye-movement over reading matter
-should be considered with reference to the eye-movement
-over the adjoining pictures. For example,
-after the title has been shown long enough to allow
-the normal reader to get to the end of the text, his
-eye may be at a point near the lower right corner or
-at the right side of the frame. Then if the following
-picture does not attract attention at this portion
-of the frame, a slight shock is caused by the necessary
-jump to a remote point of attention. A similar difficulty
-may arise in connecting a preceding picture with
-the beginning of the title.</p>
-
-<p>Many directors have endeavored to make the title<span class="pagenum" id="Page_175">175</span>
-sections of a film more pictorial by introducing decorative
-drawings or paintings around the words, and
-even by introducing miniature motion pictures. Decorations
-in motion, however, are not to be recommended,
-because they distract attention from the words
-of the title, as has been illustrated in the discussion
-of “The Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse,” on page
-46, and because they do not readily compose with
-those words to form a single picture. It is, in fact,
-as inartistic to “vision in” motion pictures on the background
-of a title as to “vision in” words on the background
-of a motion picture. In either case you really
-get two pictures within one frame.</p>
-
-<p>Fixed decorations around a title may fill a pictorial
-need in unifying the portions of the film which have
-been cut apart by the insert. They may bridge the
-gap with a continuity of tone or line or shape, and
-may by their meaning preserve the dramatic mood of
-the photoplay. But here, too, caution must be observed
-lest the decorations draw attention away from
-the words or fail to compose well with the pictorial
-character of those words.</p>
-
-<p>The problem of words on the screen does not seem
-very near a solution. There will doubtless be a great
-deal of juggling with titles before some magician
-comes who can “vanish” them completely from the
-fabric of a photoplay. Already photoplays such as
-“The Old Swimmin’ Hole,” directed by Joseph De
-Grasse and “The Journey’s End,” directed by Hugo
-Ballin, have been successfully produced without sub-titles.
-Some day, we hope, the wordless picture play
-will no longer be a novelty.</p>
-
-<p>Another factor, which has already become troublesome,
-is the reproduction of color in the motion picture.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_176">176</span>
-If the director were a genuine colorist, and
-if he could produce the exact tint or shade of hue
-which the particular composition needs, and if this
-could be projected so that the spectator would really
-see what the director wanted him to see, then the
-conditions would be ideal for mastery in color movies.
-Such conditions may some day come, but they are not
-here now.</p>
-
-<p>It is possible that the machinery of color photography
-will become so perfect that the spectator may
-be able to see on the screen the exact color values
-which were found in the subject photographed. But
-that will be only a triumph of science. It will be a
-scientific achievement of the same kind as the correct
-reproduction of colors in a lithograph or color-gravure
-of a painting. But art lies in the production and
-arrangement, not in the reproduction, of colors.</p>
-
-<p>An elementary study of painting must convince any
-one that the colors which the artist puts on the canvas
-are really only suggested by the model or subject,
-and that his arrangement of them is inspired by an
-ideal personal conception, rather than a desire to reproduce
-something with absolute accuracy. Therein
-lies creation and mastery. Hence, there is no artistic
-advantage to a cinema composer in having machines
-which can make a green dress appear green, and a red
-rose, red, on the screen, unless that particular green
-and that particular red in that particular combination
-really add beauty to the picture.</p>
-
-<p>The “tinted” scenes, usually blue or orange, which
-are so familiar in the movies, are not color photographs,
-since they are produced by immersing an ordinary
-black and white film in a bath of dye. But
-from an artistic point of view they are better than<span class="pagenum" id="Page_177">177</span>
-color photographs. In the first place, the value of the
-tint can be controlled by the director, or at least by the
-person who does the tinting. And in the second place,
-although the lights of the film take the strongest tint,
-the shadows are also affected by it; and the entire
-picture, therefore, gets a tonal unity which is never
-present in color photography. However, even “tinted”
-scenes should be used with caution, because, when they
-are cut into a film which is elsewhere black and white,
-they break the unity of tonal flow, and usually get far
-more emphasis than their meaning in the story demands.
-The effect is almost as bad as that of the
-old family photograph which baby sister has improved
-by touching up a single figure with pretty water colors.</p>
-
-<p>Thus we have indicated the many departments and
-stages of development in a photoplay composition, the
-many pictorial forces which should be controlled by a
-single hand. That single hand holds the reins of
-many powers. And, if those powers cannot be so
-guided that they pull in the same direction, with
-similar speeds, and with balanced efforts, then their
-combination is disastrous, however elegant and blue-ribboned
-any individual power may be. In the photoplay
-neither the plot action, nor the acting, nor the
-setting, nor the cutting and joining, nor the titles,
-nor the coloring, nor any other element can be allowed
-to pull in its own wild way. And in any single section
-of the motion picture the fixed design and the
-movement, the accentuation and the harmony, the
-work and the play, must be co-ordinated and all this
-technique must itself be subordinate to spontaneous
-enduring inspiration. Without such mastery no movie-maker
-can ever win to the far goal of art.</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div id="toclink_178" class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_178">178</span></p>
-
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI<br />
-
-<span class="subhead">THE MYSTERIOUS EMOTIONS OF ART</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0"><span class="firstword">The</span> end of all aspiring mastery in the movies is to
-provide for every beholder the thrills of art. These
-thrills are not like the emotions which are aroused
-by other experiences of life, by sports, for example,
-or adventure, or amusements, or industry, or war.
-They are stirring experiences quite different from
-those of him who makes a “home run” or a “touch-down,”
-or “loops the loop” in the air, or sinks a submarine,
-or has a play accepted, or discovers a new
-way of evading some obnoxious law. It is true that
-the dramatic content of a photoplay may sometimes
-seem so real that the beholder forgets where he is
-and responds with such natural feelings as fear and
-triumph, love and hate, pride, selfish desire and hope;
-but it is also true that the pictorial form of a photoplay,
-that is, the mere arrangement of the substance,
-considered apart from its meaning, can arouse strange,
-pleasurable emotions which are peculiar to the enjoyment
-of art.</p>
-
-<p>When we recall the masterpieces of painting which
-have thrilled us we must admit that much of their
-appeal came from other factors besides the content
-of the picture. Think of a portrait of some Dutchman
-painted by Rembrandt. The painting stirs you
-as the Dutchman himself in real life never could have<span class="pagenum" id="Page_179">179</span>
-stirred you. You may be impressed by the likeness
-of the portrait, by the engaging character of the person
-portrayed, and by some significant truth expressed
-in that portrayal. But that is not all. You are also
-stirred by the colors in the painting, by the peculiar
-arrangement of lines and shapes. That emotion which
-you get from the form and medium itself, rather than
-from the subject, is a characteristic art-emotion.</p>
-
-<div id="if_i_179" class="figcenter" style="max-width: 35em;">
- <img src="images/i_179.jpg" width="2182" height="1647" alt="" />
- <div class="caption">From <i>The Cabinet of Dr. Caligari</i>. A remarkable example of “stylization” in the
-movies, showing how setting, figure, and action may be harmonized to express the
-dominant mood of the photoplay. See <a href="#Page_165">pages 165</a> and <a href="#Page_180">180</a>.</div></div>
-
-<p>We are not now speaking of such qualities as unity,
-emphasis, balance, and rhythm. They are indeed fundamental
-needs in pictorial composition, and yet a
-photoplay may have all of those qualities without
-possessing any strong appeal as art. A motion picture,
-like a painting, must possess other, more subtle,
-qualities if it is to make any lasting impression upon
-our souls. What these mysterious qualities really are,
-we do not presume to know. At the same time we
-believe that a discussion of them will be stimulating
-and helpful both to “movie fans” and movie makers.
-Suppose we endeavor to isolate four of these mysterious
-qualities in art and call them poignancy, appeal
-to the imagination, exquisiteness, and reserve.</p>
-
-<p>Any one who goes frequently to the movies must
-have felt more than once a certain poignancy, a strange
-fascination in some pictorial arrangement, in some
-curiously appealing movement on the screen. Perhaps
-such a feeling came when you saw a “dissolve” for
-the first time. Perhaps the slow dying away of a
-scene, even while a new one was dawning before you,
-gave a pang of pleasure never felt before, not even
-in the magic blending of dreams. A “queer feeling”
-you may have called it, and you may have been less
-aware of it as the novelty wore off in later shows.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_180">180</span>
-Then it came again when you saw an accelerated motion
-picture which showed a plant growing from seed
-to blossom within a few minutes. And still again you
-felt it when in some slow-motion picture you saw a
-horse floating through the air. But time went on and
-the frequent repetition of these effects made their
-appeal less poignant.</p>
-
-<p>In each case the thing that stirred you was due to
-a novelty of mechanics, a trick of cinematography.
-But you can get that emotion without waiting for a
-new mechanical invention. It may come also from
-the pictorial composition, from some peculiar patternings
-of things, whether fixed or moving, within the
-picture itself. A striking illustration of this may be
-found in the German photoplay, “The Cabinet of Dr.
-Caligari,” which has been described in the preceding
-chapter. It contains at least two scenes in which
-extremely simple arrangements kindle strange flares
-of emotion. One of these moments comes in the
-scene which is represented by the “still” shown opposite
-<a href="#Page_179">page 179</a>. Here we see Cesare, the hypnotized
-sleep-walker, slinking along an alley of weird lights
-and shadows. We know from earlier scenes that he
-is bent on committing some new crime. His face is
-ghastly and his lanky frame is tightly clothed in black.
-He emerges into a bright glare and stretches forth
-his arm in an unhuman gesture, as though he were
-going to glide serpent-wise up the very side of the
-wall. This movement makes a strange pattern and
-sends through us a flash of—shall we call it a sweet
-shudder or a horrible delight?—something poignant
-and unforgettable.</p>
-
-<p>A similar experience of emotion comes to us a few<span class="pagenum" id="Page_181">181</span>
-minutes later in the same play when Cesare carries
-off the heroine from her bedchamber. This scene
-reveals a broad sea of billowy linen, evidently a bed,
-yet large enough for a whole bevy of heroines. Cesare
-appears outside a window, which seems to crumble at
-his touch. He enters the chamber and, dagger in hand,
-reaches out toward the head of the sleeping lady.
-We gasp at her fate, because we forget that this is
-only a play. That gasp is an expression of pity, a
-familiar emotion. But a mysterious emotion is in
-store for us. Cesare is spellbound by the lady’s beauty.
-He drops his dagger. Then suddenly he gathers her
-up, and, holding her against the side of his body,
-starts for the window. As he does so a sudden striking
-pattern is produced by the movement. In his
-haste Cesare has caught up some of the bed linen
-along with his prey, and this white expanse darts after
-him in a sudden inward-rushing movement from the
-remote corners of the bed. Instantly a strange sensation
-shoots through us. This sharp emotion, both
-painful and pleasing, is not pity, or hate, or fear. It
-does not relate itself to the villain’s violence against
-an innocent, defenseless girl. It is merely a “queer
-feeling” caused by that striking motion-pattern of the
-snowy linen whisked unexpectedly from the bed.</p>
-
-<p>To one who has been emotionally affected by such
-things as the “dissolve” and retarded motion and the
-peculiar effects in “Dr. Caligari” the above paragraphs
-may give some idea of what we mean by poignancy
-in composition. It is a real quality tinged with an
-unreality that allies it with the effects which we experience
-in dreams. Any cinema composer who can strike
-this note of poignancy at least once in every photoplay<span class="pagenum" id="Page_182">182</span>
-that he produces may justly demand that his work be
-classed with the fine arts.</p>
-
-<p>Another elusive quality, found all too seldom in the
-movies, is the appeal to imagination. Such an appeal
-may come from things in real life or from that life
-which art reflects; it may come also from the artist’s
-medium and composition. Thus, for example, some
-people can imagine melodious sounds when they look
-at colors in a painting, and nearly every one can imagine
-colors when listening to music. The motion
-picture’s appeal to the imagination has been treated
-at some length in Chapter VI of “The Art of Photoplay
-Making,” and we shall, therefore, be brief about
-it here. An illustration may be furnished by a sea-shell.
-We hold it to our ears and hear a low musical
-sound which makes us imagine the surf of the sea,
-sweetly vague. A similar, yet more subtle, delight
-may come from a picture of some person doing the
-same thing. Such a picture is to be found in the
-Fox film version of Longfellow’s “Evangeline.”
-Gabriel picks up a sea-shell and holds it to his ear.
-Instantly we imagine the sound which he hears. We
-also imagine the sea which that imagined sound suggests.
-And, if we are particularly sensitive, we may
-even try to imagine what Gabriel imagines. All this
-is delightful, a genuine emotional response to the art
-of the screen. But we are immediately insulted by
-an ugly anti-climax. Quick as a flash, our fancies
-are killed by a cut-in picture of a stretch of real sea.
-Now we must look; we may no longer imagine.</p>
-
-<p>The above is a typical example of both imaginative
-and unimaginative treatment in a motion picture. Any
-reader can go to the movies and collect a hundred<span class="pagenum" id="Page_183">183</span>
-similar examples in a few evenings. Over and over
-again a director will lead us to the threshold of beautiful
-fancy, only to slam the door of hard realism
-against our faces. Why is this? Is it because the
-director thinks that audiences are incapable of exercising
-and enjoying their imaginations? Or is it only
-because he wants to get more footage for the film?</p>
-
-<p>As though it were not bad enough to spoil the
-pictorial beauty of cinema composition, many directors
-proceed to spoil the charm of other arts, too.
-Poetry, for instance, may weave her spells elsewhere,
-but not upon the screen. Even the simplest poetic
-statement must be vulgarized by explanation. “Movie
-fans” are not considered intelligent enough to be
-trusted with the enjoyment of even such harmless
-imagery as</p>
-
-<div class="poetry-container">
-<div class="poetry">
- <div class="stanza">
- <div class="verse indentq">“There is a tide in the affairs of men</div>
- <div class="verse indent0">Which taken at the turn leads on to fortune.”</div>
- </div>
-</div>
-</div>
-
-<p class="in0">During all the three hundred years since those lines
-were written, probably no illustrator of Shakespeare’s
-plays ever felt called upon to draw a picture of that
-tide, and probably no actor ever strove to represent
-it on the stage by voice or gesture. But in De Mille’s
-photoplay “Male and Female,” where the passage is
-quoted, the lines on the screen must be accompanied by
-a photograph of surf, which was evidently intended
-to represent the tide!</p>
-
-<p>Shakespeare’s poetic image was thus killed by a
-single shot. But it sometimes takes more ingenuity to
-destroy a charm. Take, for instance, this descriptive
-line from “Evangeline”:</p>
-
-<div class="blockquot">
-
-<p>“When she had passed, it seemed like the ceasing of exquisite
-music.”</p>
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_184">184</span></p>
-
-<p>Those words are surely full of emotional, imaginative
-appeal. Yes, but not for the director of the
-Fox “Evangeline.” He inserts the line as a title, then
-shows Evangeline strolling over a forest path, and then
-“cuts in” a close-up of hands playing across the
-strings of a gigantic harp!</p>
-
-<p>There is nothing mysterious about the emotions of
-any moderately intelligent person who sees things like
-that on the screen. “Movie stuff!” he groans, and wonders
-“how they have the nerve to get away with it.”
-We have a quarrel with the director, not because he
-has failed to picturize the imagined sweetness of
-that silence which comes when exquisite music has
-ceased, but because he has considered it necessary
-to picturize anything at all in support of the poet’s
-words.</p>
-
-<p>This brings us again to the question whether art
-should strive to present any beauty other than that
-of the subject represented. Was he a great artist who,
-according to an old fable, painted fruit so realistically
-that the birds came to peck at it? And would Michelangelo
-have been a better artist if he had given his
-marble statues the colors of real flesh, or if he had
-made statues with flesh soft to the touch and capable
-of perspiring on a hot day? We think not.</p>
-
-<p>Art may please through illusion, but never by deception.
-We get a peculiar emotional experience from
-imagining that Michelangelo’s “Moses” is alive with
-human grandeur, but we should not like to be caught
-in a mob of idiots staring at some more realistically
-sculptural Moses, in the expectation that he was about
-to make a speech or perform a trick. Neither can we
-go into ecstasies over the fact that the fur mantle in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_185">185</span>
-some portrait is so skillfully painted that all the women
-want to stroke it.</p>
-
-<p>The depressing thing about many movies is that
-they are to the ideal photoplay what the wax figure
-of a shop window is to sculpture. Instead of dancing
-lightly through a rich atmosphere of suggestion they
-are anchored heavily with bolts of dollar-marked
-material. And worse days are to come if the “stunt”
-workers are fed with applause. They promise us pictures
-in natural colors, more natural than any now
-produced. They promise us pictures that have depth
-so real that the beholder may be tempted to take a
-stroll into them. They promise us pictures that talk,
-and whistle, and chirp, and bark. And perhaps somewhere
-they are even promising pictures that will give
-off scents.</p>
-
-<p>All these wonders will create industrial activity.
-They will make good advertising, and will doubtless
-bring crowds to the theaters. But they will not bring
-happiness to those fortunate individuals who can enjoy
-art because it is art, who can get a finer thrill from a
-painting that felicitously suggests interesting trees,
-than from one which looks so much like a real orchard
-that the birds and bees swarm in through the gallery
-doors.</p>
-
-<p>Let the motion picture look like a motion picture
-of life, and not like life itself. Let the mobilization
-of characters in a photoplay start fancies and stir emotions
-finer and deeper than any which we can experience
-by observing our neighbors or by reading sensational
-newspapers. Let the lights and shadows on the
-screen, the lines and shapes, the patterns and movements
-suggest to our imaginations richer beauties than<span class="pagenum" id="Page_186">186</span>
-those which are actually shown to our eyes. Let the
-motion picture become as romantic as music, and yet
-remain equally consistent with reality and truth.</p>
-
-<p>Thus we have considered two mysterious art-emotions,
-namely, that which is aroused by a peculiar
-artistic poignancy in the cinema design itself, and
-that which is aroused when the suggestions and associations
-of the design make our own imaginations
-creative. A third art-emotion comes from the conscious
-or sub-conscious appreciation of something
-exquisite in the finished product.</p>
-
-<p>Exquisite values and exquisite combinations are
-present in the masterpieces of every art. The sweet
-blending of musical tones which leads into a delicacy
-of overtones that no ear can distinguish; the subtle
-shadings of color in a painting, soft touches of pictorial
-harmony which can be felt more surely than
-they can be seen; tender curves in the most vigorous
-statue, and marble surfaces surging so slightly that
-their shadows scarcely linger; crisp edges of acanthus
-leaves in a Greek capital and the almost imperceptible
-swelling of the column beneath; the sparkle, the caper
-and the organ-music of a poem you love—these are
-the exquisite things in art. And there are many others
-less tangible. They thrill you again and again with
-feelings too refined for description in words.</p>
-
-<p>Can the motion picture achieve a similar refinement?
-Or must it always deserve the epithet “crude”?
-When half of the typical movie’s brute strength and
-snorting speed can be exchanged for tenderness and
-spirituality we shall have a new era in cinema history.
-That era may dawn while the doubters are still slumbering.
-Even now we occasionally see motion pictures<span class="pagenum" id="Page_187">187</span>
-which are sparkling without the so-called “flashes”
-of scenes, pictures which flow firmly, one into the next,
-with delicate mingling of tones and patterns, pictures
-in which sometimes the moving elements are as airy as
-gossamer threads blown by a fairy’s breath.</p>
-
-<p>This quality of exquisiteness is something which
-the director cannot produce by taking thought or
-signing a contract. Other values he may develop by
-study and experiment, but not this one. He may bring
-balance and unity to his pictorial elements; he may
-accent the interests properly; he may succeed in starting
-a vital rhythm and stimulating the beholder’s fancy,
-all this through determined application of skill; but
-he will need the help of inspiration before he can
-create the charm of exquisiteness. The gods have
-granted that mysterious help to other artists; they
-will grant it to the cinema composer, too, whenever
-he proves worthy.</p>
-
-<p>There is at least another peculiar art-emotion which
-the cinema composer should be able to arouse. It is
-the emotion which comes over us at the overwhelming
-discovery that a given masterpiece of art has a wealth
-of beauty that we can never hope to exhaust. That
-emotion is stimulated by the reserve which lies back
-of all really masterful performance in art. We feel
-it when we have read a poem for the twentieth time
-and know that if we read it again we shall find new
-beauties and deeper meaning. We feel it in a concert
-hall listening to a symphony that has been played for
-us repeatedly since childhood and yet reveals fresh
-beauties to our maturing powers of appreciation. We
-feel it in the mystic dimness of some cathedral beneath
-whose arches a score of generations have prayed and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_188">188</span>
-the most eloquent disbeliever of today stands gaping
-in silence. Behind the human power which wrote the
-poem, or composed the music, or built the cathedral
-lies a vast reserve; and, though it was not drawn upon,
-we seem to glimpse that reserve forever in the finished
-masterpiece.</p>
-
-<p>Has any reader of this book gone to see the same
-photoplay ten times? And if so, why? Was it because
-of some irresistible, undying lure in the content
-of that photoplay or in the pictorial form of that
-content? Did you go of your own free will? Did
-you even make a sacrifice to see it the tenth time?
-If so, then you have known the calm joy of a reserve
-power in the newest of the arts.</p>
-
-<p>Unfortunately reserve is not characteristic of the
-movies. It is seldom indeed that a photoplay contains
-anything of value that cannot be caught during the
-first showing. In fact, it happens rather frequently
-that a photoplay uses up every ounce of its own proper
-power and then is forced to call in the help of something
-known as “padding” before it measures up to
-the commercial fullness of five reels, or whatever the
-contract stipulates. If you poke around through this
-padding, you will find that it is usually made up of
-innocent kittens, ducklings, calves, human babies, and
-other “ain’t-it-cunnin’” stuff, which may arouse emotions,
-to be sure, but not the emotions which make up
-the enjoyment of art as art.</p>
-
-<p>Another typical lack of reserve is illustrated in the
-building and decoration of settings. Avalanches of
-furniture are apparently necessary to show that a character
-is well-to-do. The heroine’s boudoir must look
-like a gift shop, and her dressing table like a drug<span class="pagenum" id="Page_189">189</span>
-store counter, in order to convince the audience that
-she spends a few sacred moments of the day attending
-to her finger nails. Walls of rooms must be
-paneled off by scores of framed pictures, mirrors, etc.,
-so that, no matter where the actor stands, his head
-will be strikingly set off by some ornamental frame.
-Floors must look partly like an Oriental bazaar and
-partly like a fur market. Chairs, tables, cabinets, beds,
-and what-nots, must carry our minds to Versailles and
-the Bronx, to Buckingham Palace, and Hollywood.
-Hangings of plush and silk, tapestries of cloth of
-gold, curtains of lace or batiked silk, cords of intricate
-plaiting, must flow from the heights, waving in
-the breeze to prove that they are real. All this extravagance
-must be, we presume, in order to show
-that the heroine lives on an income and not a salary,
-and in order to give the brides in the audience new
-ideas for mortgaging their husbands’ futures at the
-installment-plan stores.</p>
-
-<p>With such extravagance of materials in a picture
-there can be no simplicity or reserve in the pictorial
-composition, if indeed there can be any composition
-at all. Whatever design the director gives
-to the miscellaneous lines and shapes will seem rather
-like a last despairing effort than the easy, happy touch
-of a master’s hand.</p>
-
-<p>The hysterical extravagance of the movies is further
-illustrated in the breathless speed which so often
-characterizes every moving thing on the screen. We
-feel that, at the end of the road, horses must expire
-from exhaustion and automobiles must catch fire from
-excessive friction. Clouds are driven by hurricanes,
-rivers shoot, trees snap, and the most dignified gentleman<span class="pagenum" id="Page_190">190</span>
-dog-trots. It is true that some of this breathlessness
-carries with it a certain thrill for the spectator,
-but that thrill is by no means to be classed as
-an æsthetic emotion. It has nothing of that abiding
-joy which comes from the consciousness of restrained
-energy in art.</p>
-
-<p>Much of this feverish activity, this “jazz” of the
-screen, is due to rapidity of projection; and yet the
-director is responsible, for he certainly knows the
-probable rate of projection and can control his composition
-accordingly by retarding actions or by selecting
-slower actions in place of those which cannot be
-retarded. Slowness of movement, where it is not
-unnatural, is pleasant to the eye, as we have said in
-preceding chapters, but it has a peculiar appeal for the
-emotions, too. It fills us with a sense of the majesty
-that none can shake, of the deep currents that none
-can turn aside.</p>
-
-<p>How to produce a picture that shall impress an
-audience with its inexhaustible reserve is a secret that
-remains with him who has the power. So, too, with
-the other pictorial qualities discussed in this chapter.
-We know of no formulas by which the mysterious
-art-emotions can be aroused. Yet if directors and
-spectators alike ponder over these mysteries, it will
-surely help them to separate the gold from the dross.</p>
-
-<p>Let us vision an ideal photoplay. It is entrancing,
-yet restful, to the eye. Its composition is both vigorous
-and graceful, as harmonious as music. Our sympathies
-are stirred warmly by the experiences of the
-persons in the story. We are held in keen suspense
-as to the dramatic outcome. And we get also the
-more subtle art-emotions. Our souls are shot through<span class="pagenum" id="Page_191">191</span>
-by the poignancy of fixed and flowing designs. We
-are fascinated by these designs at the same time that
-our fancies pass through and beyond them. The visible
-work of the artist is only a mesh-work through which
-our imaginations are whirled away into rapturous
-regions of experiences unlived and unexpressed. Such
-transports may be brief, yet they are measureless in
-their flights. Our attention swings back from these
-far flights into a quiet response to the delicacy of
-arrangement of line and shape, of texture and tone,
-of blending and weaving and vanishing values. We
-feel an exquisiteness too fine for understanding, which
-tapers away at last until it is too fine for the most
-sensitive feeling. And during all the while that we
-are rapt by the poignancy, the imagination, the exquisiteness
-of the master’s production, we feel that a
-rich reserve lies beyond our grasp or touch. We cannot
-quite soar to the master’s heights, or plumb his
-depths, or separate the airy fibers of his weaving.</p>
-
-<p>Yet, when such beauty comes to the screen, who
-shall say that it is a miracle, that the manner of its
-coming is above every law and beyond all conjecture?
-And who shall say that the hour of its coming has not
-been hastened by the million spectators whose judgments
-have been whetted and whose sympathies have
-been deepened by taking thought about the nature
-of art?</p>
-
-<hr />
-
-<div class="chapter"><div class="transnote">
-<h2 class="nobreak" id="Transcribers_Notes">Transcriber’s Notes</h2>
-
-<p>Punctuation, hyphenation, and spelling were made
-consistent when a predominant preference was found
-in the original book; otherwise they were not changed.</p>
-
-<p>Simple typographical errors were corrected; unbalanced
-quotation marks were remedied when the change was
-obvious, and otherwise left unbalanced.</p>
-
-<p>Illustrations in this eBook have been positioned
-between paragraphs and outside quotations. In versions
-of this eBook that support hyperlinks, the page
-references in the List of Illustrations lead to the
-corresponding illustrations.</p>
-
-<p><a href="#Page_14">Page 14</a>: “propellors” was printed that way.</p>
-
-<p><a href="#Page_120">Page 120</a>: “Pavlowa” was printed that way.</p>
-</div></div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PICTORIAL BEAUTY ON THE SCREEN ***</div>
-<div style='text-align:left'>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Updated editions will replace the previous one&#8212;the old editions will
-be renamed.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
-States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG&#8482;
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-</div>
-
-<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br />
-<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br />
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span>
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-To protect the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase &#8220;Project
-Gutenberg&#8221;), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person
-or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.B. &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (&#8220;the
-Foundation&#8221; or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg&#8482; work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work (any work
-on which the phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; appears, or with which the
-phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-</div>
-
-<blockquote>
- <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
- other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
- whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
- of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
- at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
- are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws
- of the country where you are located before using this eBook.
- </div>
-</blockquote>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase &#8220;Project
-Gutenberg&#8221; associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg&#8482; License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg&#8482;.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; License.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work in a format
-other than &#8220;Plain Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg&#8482; website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original &#8220;Plain
-Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg&#8482; works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-provided that:
-</div>
-
-<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'>
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &bull; You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, &#8220;Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation.&#8221;
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &bull; You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
- works.
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &bull; You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
- </div>
-
- <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
- &bull; You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works.
- </div>
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain &#8220;Defects,&#8221; such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the &#8220;Right
-of Replacement or Refund&#8221; described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you &#8216;AS-IS&#8217;, WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg&#8482;&#8217;s
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg&#8482; collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg&#8482; and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation&#8217;s EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state&#8217;s laws.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Foundation&#8217;s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation&#8217;s website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
-public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
-visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg&#8482; concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>.
-</div>
-
-<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg&#8482;,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
-</div>
-
-</div>
-</body>
-</html>